diff options
| author | Gerald Carter <jerry@samba.org> | 2001-02-22 13:53:09 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Gerald Carter <jerry@samba.org> | 2001-02-22 13:53:09 +0000 |
| commit | a1311b33ff3e1c9fa9593e56146325559b4b57f1 (patch) | |
| tree | e4fcee62b96f3b5643c16933b05f48e7d45d4324 /docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html | |
| parent | 82237a7e077ad79f3b55ae43150d86950bd47a99 (diff) | |
| download | samba-a1311b33ff3e1c9fa9593e56146325559b4b57f1.tar.gz samba-a1311b33ff3e1c9fa9593e56146325559b4b57f1.tar.bz2 samba-a1311b33ff3e1c9fa9593e56146325559b4b57f1.zip | |
generated man page and html version of smb.conf(5)
(This used to be commit 14d8d881ec6e4d5e3541d14e8015d6b7e8fda349)
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html | 21218 |
1 files changed, 16146 insertions, 5072 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html index f3ddfbc33c..71f05fc1dc 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html @@ -1,5080 +1,16154 @@ - - - - - - -<html><head><title>smb.conf (5)</title> - -<link rev="made" href="mailto:samba@samba.org"> -</head> -<body> - -<hr> - -<h1>smb.conf (5)</h1> -<h2>Samba</h2> -<h2>23 Oct 1998</h2> - - - -<p><a name="NAME"></a> -<h2>NAME</h2> - smb.conf - The configuration file for the Samba suite -<p><a name="SYNOPSIS"></a> -<h2>SYNOPSIS</h2> - -<p><strong>smb.conf</strong> The <strong>smb.conf</strong> file is a configuration file for the -Samba suite. <strong>smb.conf</strong> contains runtime configuration information -for the Samba programs. The <strong>smb.conf</strong> file is designed to be -configured and administered by the <a href="swat.8.html"><strong>swat (8)</strong></a> -program. The complete description of the file format and possible -parameters held within are here for reference purposes. -<p><a name="FILEFORMAT"></a> -<h2>FILE FORMAT</h2> - -<p>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with -the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the -next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form -<p><code>'name = value'</code> -<p>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line -represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter. -<p>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive. -<p>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. Whitespace -before or after the first equals sign is discarded. Leading, trailing -and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is -irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is -discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained -verbatim. -<p>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') character is -ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace. -<p>Any line ending in a <code>'\'</code> is "continued" on the next line in the -customary UNIX fashion. -<p>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a -string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, -0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is -preserved in string values. Some items such as create modes are -numeric. -<p><a name="SECTIONDESCRIPTIONS"></a> -<h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2> - -<p>Each section in the configuration file (except for the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section) describes a shared resource (known -as a <em>"share"</em>). The section name is the name of the shared resource -and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes. -<p>There are three special sections, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a>, which are -described under <a href="smb.conf.5.html#SPECIALSECTIONS"><strong>'special sections'</strong></a>. The -following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions. -<p>A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus -a description of the access rights which are granted to the user of -the service. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable. -<p>Sections are either filespace services (used by the client as an -extension of their native file systems) or printable services (used by -the client to access print services on the host running the server). -<p>Sections may be designated <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest</strong></a> services, in which -case no password is required to access them. A specified UNIX -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a> is used to define access -privileges in this case. -<p>Sections other than guest services will require a password to access -them. The client provides the username. As older clients only provide -passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to -check against the password using the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user="</strong></a> option in -the share definition. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and -Windows NT, this should not be necessary. -<p>Note that the access rights granted by the server are masked by the -access rights granted to the specified or guest UNIX user by the host -system. The server does not grant more access than the host system -grants. -<p>The following sample section defines a file space share. The user has -write access to the path <code>/home/bar</code>. The share is accessed via -the share name "foo": -<p><pre> - - - [foo] +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>smb.conf</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="REFENTRY" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><H1 +><A +NAME="SMB.CONF" +>smb.conf</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="REFNAMEDIV" +><A +NAME="AEN5" +></A +><H2 +>Name</H2 +>smb.conf -- The configuration file for the Samba suite</DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN8" +></A +><H2 +>SYNOPSIS</H2 +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file is a configuration + file for the Samba suite. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> contains + runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file is designed to be configured and + administered by the <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +> + </A +> program. The complete description of the file format and + possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN16" +></A +><H2 +>FILE FORMAT</H2 +><P +>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section + begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues + until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the + form</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>name</I +></TT +> = <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>value + </I +></TT +></P +><P +>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated + line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.</P +><P +>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.</P +><P +>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. + Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded. + Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter + names is irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter + value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value + is retained verbatim.</P +><P +>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') + character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.</P +><P +>Any line ending in a '\' is continued + on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.</P +><P +>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all + either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given + as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean + values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as + create modes are numeric.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN28" +></A +><H2 +>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</H2 +><P +>Each section in the configuration file (except for the + [global] section) describes a shared resource (known + as a "share"). The section name is the name of the + shared resource and the parameters within the section define + the shares attributes.</P +><P +>There are three special sections, [global], + [homes] and [printers], which are + described under <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>special sections</I +>. The + following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.</P +><P +>A share consists of a directory to which access is being + given plus a description of the access rights which are granted + to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are + also specifiable.</P +><P +>Sections are either filespace services (used by the + client as an extension of their native file systems) or + printable services (used by the client to access print services + on the host running the server).</P +><P +>Sections may be designated <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>guest</I +> services, + in which case no password is required to access them. A specified + UNIX <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>guest account</I +> is used to define access + privileges in this case.</P +><P +>Sections other than guest services will require a password + to access them. The client provides the username. As older clients + only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list + of usernames to check against the password using the "user=" + option in the share definition. For modern clients such as + Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.</P +><P +>Note that the access rights granted by the server are + masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest + UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more + access than the host system grants.</P +><P +>The following sample section defines a file space share. + The user has write access to the path <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/home/bar</TT +>. + The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [foo] path = /home/bar writeable = true - - -</pre> - -<p>The following sample section defines a printable share. The share -is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write access permitted -is via calls to open, write to and close a spool file. The -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>'guest ok'</strong></a> parameter means access will be permitted -as the default guest user (specified elsewhere): -<p><pre> - - [aprinter] + </TT +> + </PRE +><P +>The following sample section defines a printable share. + The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write + access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a + spool file. The <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>guest ok</I +> parameter means + access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified + elsewhere):</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [aprinter] path = /usr/spool/public writeable = false printable = true guest ok = true - -</pre> - -<p><a name="SPECIALSECTIONS"></a> -<h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2> - -<p><dl> -<p><a name="global"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>The [global] section</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are -defaults for sections which do not specifically define certain -items. See the notes under <a href="smb.conf.5.html#PARAMETERS"><strong>'PARAMETERS'</strong></a> for more -information. -<p><a name="homes"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>The [homes] section</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If a section called <code>'homes'</code> is included in the configuration file, -services connecting clients to their home directories can be created -on the fly by the server. -<p>When the connection request is made, the existing sections are -scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, the -requested section name is treated as a user name and looked up in the -local password file. If the name exists and the correct password has -been given, a share is created by cloning the [homes] section. -<p>Some modifications are then made to the newly created share: -<p><dl> -<p><li > The share name is changed from <code>'homes'</code> to the located -username -<p><li > If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home -directory. -<p></dl> -<p>If you decide to use a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path=</strong></a> line in your [homes] -section then you may find it useful to use the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a> -macro. For example : -<p><code>path=/data/pchome/%S</code> -<p>would be useful if you have different home directories for your PCs -than for UNIX access. -<p>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access -to their home directories with a minimum of fuss. -<p>A similar process occurs if the requested section name is <code>"homes"</code>, -except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting -user. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different -users share a client PC. -<p>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service -section can specify, though some make more sense than others. The -following is a typical and suitable [homes] section: -<p><pre> - - [homes] - writeable = yes - -</pre> - -<p>An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] -section, all home directories will be visible to all clients -<strong>without a password</strong>. In the very unlikely event that this is -actually desirable, it would be wise to also specify <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read only -access</strong></a>. -<p>Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browseable"><strong>browseable</strong></a> flag for auto home -directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the -[homes] browseable flag. This is useful as it means setting -browseable=no in the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but -make any auto home directories visible. -<p><a name="printers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>The [printers] section</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This section works like <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a>, but for printers. -<p>If a <strong>[printers]</strong> section occurs in the configuration file, users are -able to connect to any printer specified in the local host's printcap -file. -<p>When a connection request is made, the existing sections are -scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, but a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> section exists, it is used as described -above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a printer -name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see if the -requested section name is a valid printer share name. If a match is -found, a new printer share is created by cloning the <strong>[printers]</strong> -section. -<p>A few modifications are then made to the newly created share: -<p><dl> -<p><li > The share name is set to the located printer name -<p><li > If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the -located printer name -<p><li > If the share does not permit guest access and no username was -given, the username is set to the located printer name. -<p></dl> -<p>Note that the <strong>[printers]</strong> service MUST be printable - if you specify -otherwise, the server will refuse to load the configuration file. -<p>Typically the path specified would be that of a world-writeable spool -directory with the sticky bit set on it. A typical <strong>[printers]</strong> entry -would look like this: -<p><pre> - - [printers] - path = /usr/spool/public - guest ok = yes - printable = yes - -</pre> - -<p>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate -printer names as far as the server is concerned. If your printing -subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a -pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like -this: -<p><pre> - alias|alias|alias|alias... -</pre> - -<p>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing -subsystem. In the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section, specify the new -file as your printcap. The server will then only recognize names -found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain whatever -aliases you like. The same technique could be used simply to limit -access to a subset of your local printers. -<p>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry -of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, components -(if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols -("|"). -<p>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are -defined on the system you may be able to use <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>"printcap name = -lpstat"</strong></a> to automatically obtain a list of -printers. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>"printcap name"</strong></a> option for -more details. -<p></dl> -<p><a name="PARAMETERS"></a> -<h2>PARAMETERS</h2> - -<p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections. -<p>Some parameters are specific to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section -(e.g., <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a>). Some parameters are usable in -all sections (e.g., <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>create mode</strong></a>). All others are -permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following -descriptions the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> sections will be considered normal. -The letter <code>'G'</code> in parentheses indicates that a parameter is -specific to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section. The letter <code>'S'</code> -indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific -section. Note that all <code>'S'</code> parameters can also be specified in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section - in which case they will define -the default behavior for all services. -<p>Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not -create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there -are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the -preferred synonym. -<p><a name="VARIABLESUBSTITUTIONS"></a> -<h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2> - -<p>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take -substitutions. For example the option <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong><code>"path = -/tmp/%u"</code></strong></a> would be interpreted as <code>"path = /tmp/john"</code> if -the user connected with the username john. -<p>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but -there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they might -be relevant. These are: -<p><dl> -<p><a name="percentS"></a> -<li > <strong>%S</strong> = the name of the current service, if any. -<p><a name="percentP"></a> -<li > <strong>%P</strong> = the root directory of the current service, if any. -<p><a name="percentu"></a> -<li > <strong>%u</strong> = user name of the current service, if any. -<p><a name="percentg"></a> -<li > <strong>%g</strong> = primary group name of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>. -<p><a name="percentU"></a> -<li > <strong>%U</strong> = session user name (the user name that -the client wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got). -<p><a name="percentG"></a> -<li > <strong>%G</strong> = primary group name of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%U</strong></a>. -<p><a name="percentH"></a> -<li > <strong>%H</strong> = the home directory of the user given by <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>. -<p><a name="percentv"></a> -<li > <strong>%v</strong> = the Samba version. -<p><a name="percenth"></a> -<li > <strong>%h</strong> = the internet hostname that Samba is running on. -<p><a name="percentm"></a> -<li > <strong>%m</strong> = the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful). -<p><a name="percentL"></a> -<li > <strong>%L</strong> = the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you to change your -config based on what the client calls you. Your server can have a "dual -personality". -<p><a name="percentM"></a> -<li > <strong>%M</strong> = the internet name of the client machine. -<p><a name="percentN"></a> -<li > <strong>%N</strong> = the name of your NIS home directory server. This is -obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have not compiled Samba -with the <strong>--with-automount</strong> option then this value will be the same -as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentL"><strong>%L</strong></a>. -<p><a name="percentp"></a> -<li > <strong>%p</strong> = the path of the service's home directory, obtained from your NIS -auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry is split up as "%N:%p". -<p><a name="percentR"></a> -<li > <strong>%R</strong> = the selected protocol level after protocol -negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1. -<p><a name="percentd"></a> -<li > <strong>%d</strong> = The process id of the current server process. -<p><a name="percenta"></a> -<li > <strong>%a</strong> = the architecture of the remote -machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be 100% -reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, WinNT and -Win95. Anything else will be known as "UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong -then sending a level 3 log to <a href="mailto:samba@samba.org"><em>samba@samba.org</em></a> -should allow it to be fixed. -<p><a name="percentI"></a> -<li > <strong>%I</strong> = The IP address of the client machine. -<p><a name="percentT"></a> -<li > <strong>%T</strong> = the current date and time. -<p></dl> -<p>There are some quite creative things that can be done with these -substitutions and other smb.conf options. -<p><a name="NAMEMANGLING"></a> -<h2>NAME MANGLING</h2> - -<p>Samba supports <em>"name mangling"</em> so that DOS and Windows clients can -use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to -adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames. -<p>There are several options that control the way mangling is performed, -and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. For the -defaults look at the output of the testparm program. -<p>All of these options can be set separately for each service (or -globally, of course). -<p>The options are: -<p><a name="manglecaseoption"></a> -<strong>"mangle case = yes/no"</strong> controls if names that have characters that -aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, if this is yes -then a name like <code>"Mail"</code> would be mangled. Default <em>no</em>. -<p><a name="casesensitiveoption"></a> -<strong>"case sensitive = yes/no"</strong> controls whether filenames are case -sensitive. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and -match on passed names. Default <em>no</em>. -<p><a name="defaultcaseoption"></a> -<strong>"default case = upper/lower"</strong> controls what the default case is for new -filenames. Default <em>lower</em>. -<p><a name="preservecaseoption"></a> -<strong>"preserve case = yes/no"</strong> controls if new files are created with the -case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> -case. Default <em>Yes</em>. -<p><a name="shortpreservecaseoption"></a> -<p><strong>"short preserve case = yes/no"</strong> controls if new files which conform -to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are -created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> -case. This option can be use with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecaseoption"><strong>"preserve case = -yes"</strong></a> to permit long filenames to retain their -case, while short names are lowered. Default <em>Yes</em>. -<p>By default, Samba 2.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT -server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving. -<p><a name="NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"></a> -<h2>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</h2> - -<p>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a -service. The server follows the following steps in determining if it -will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the steps fail -then the connection request is rejected. If one of the steps pass then -the following steps are not checked. -<p>If the service is marked <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only = yes"</strong></a> then -steps 1 to 5 are skipped. -<p><ol> -<p><li> Step 1: If the client has passed a username/password pair and -that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password -programs then the connection is made as that username. Note that this -includes the <code>\\server\service%username</code> method of passing a -username. -<p><li> Step 2: If the client has previously registered a username with -the system and now supplies a correct password for that username then -the connection is allowed. -<p><li> Step 3: The client's netbios name and any previously used user -names are checked against the supplied password, if they match then -the connection is allowed as the corresponding user. -<p><li> Step 4: If the client has previously validated a -username/password pair with the server and the client has passed the -validation token then that username is used. -<p><li> Step 5: If a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user = "</strong></a> field is given in the -smb.conf file for the service and the client has supplied a password, -and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's password -checking) with one of the usernames from the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a> -field then the connection is made as the username in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user="</strong></a> line. If one of the username in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a> list begins with a <code>'@'</code> then that name -expands to a list of names in the group of the same name. -<p><li> Step 6: If the service is a guest service then a connection is -made as the username given in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account -="</strong></a> for the service, irrespective of the supplied -password. -<p></ol> -<p><a name="COMPLETELISTOFGLOBALPARAMETERS"></a> -<h2>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</h2> - -<p>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of each -parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms. -<p><dl> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#adduserscript"><strong>add user script</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowtrusteddomains"><strong>allow trusted domains</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#announceas"><strong>announce as</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#announceversion"><strong>announce version</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#autoservices"><strong>auto services</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#bindinterfacesonly"><strong>bind interfaces only</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browselist"><strong>browse list</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#changenotifytimeout"><strong>change notify timeout</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#characterset"><strong>character set</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#codingsystem"><strong>coding system</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#configfile"><strong>config file</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deadtime"><strong>deadtime</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debughirestimestamp"><strong>debug hires timestamp</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugpid"><strong>debug pid</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugtimestamp"><strong>debug timestamp</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuguid"><strong>debug uid</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>debug level</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#default"><strong>default</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultservice"><strong>default service</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deleteuserscript"><strong>delete user script</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dfreecommand"><strong>dfree command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dnsproxy"><strong>dns proxy</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainadmingroup"><strong>domain admin group</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainadminusers"><strong>domain admin users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domaingroups"><strong>domain groups</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainguestgroup"><strong>domain guest group</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainguestusers"><strong>domain guest users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>domain logons</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainmaster"><strong>domain master</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>encrypt passwords</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#getwdcache"><strong>getwd cache</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidelocalusers"><strong>hide local users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homedirmap"><strong>homedir map</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsequiv"><strong>hosts equiv</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#keepalive"><strong>keepalive</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>kernel oplocks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapfilter"><strong>ldap filter</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapport"><strong>ldap port</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaproot"><strong>ldap root</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaprootpasswd"><strong>ldap root passwd</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapserver"><strong>ldap server</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldapsuffix"><strong>ldap suffix</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>lm announce</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>lm interval</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters"><strong>load printers</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>local master</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdir"><strong>lock dir</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>lock directory</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logfile"><strong>log file</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"><strong>log level</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logondrive"><strong>logon drive</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonhome"><strong>logon home</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonpath"><strong>logon path</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonscript"><strong>logon script</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcachetime"><strong>lpq cache time</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#machinepasswordtimeout"><strong>machine password timeout</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mangledstack"><strong>mangled stack</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>map to guest</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxdisksize"><strong>max disk size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize"><strong>max log size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxmux"><strong>max mux</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxopenfiles"><strong>max open files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxpacket"><strong>max packet</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxttl"><strong>max ttl</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxwinsttl"><strong>max wins ttl</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxxmit"><strong>max xmit</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#messagecommand"><strong>message command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minpasswdlength"><strong>min passwd length</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minpasswordlength"><strong>min password length</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minwinsttl"><strong>min wins ttl</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>name resolve order</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>netbios aliases</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>netbios name</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosscope"><strong>netbios scope</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>nis homedir</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ntaclsupport"><strong>nt acl support</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ntpipesupport"><strong>nt pipe support</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ntsmbsupport"><strong>nt smb support</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nullpasswords"><strong>null passwords</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#olelockingcompatibility"><strong>ole locking compatibility</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplockbreakwaittime"><strong>oplock break wait time</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oslevel"><strong>os level</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#packetsize"><strong>packet size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#panicaction"><strong>panic action</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>passwd chat</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchatdebug"><strong>passwd chat debug</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>passwd program</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordlevel"><strong>password level</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password server</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferedmaster"><strong>prefered master</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferredmaster"><strong>preferred master</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preload"><strong>preload</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcap"><strong>printcap</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>printcap name</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>printer driver file</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#protocol"><strong>protocol</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readbmpx"><strong>read bmpx</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readprediction"><strong>read prediction</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readraw"><strong>read raw</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readsize"><strong>read size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#remoteannounce"><strong>remote announce</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#remotebrowsesync"><strong>remote browse sync</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#restrictanonymous"><strong>restrict anonymous</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#root"><strong>root</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdir"><strong>root dir</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>root directory</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#serverstring"><strong>server string</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sharedmemsize"><strong>shared mem size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#smbpasswdfile"><strong>smb passwd file</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#smbrun"><strong>smbrun</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketaddress"><strong>socket address</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"><strong>socket options</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sourceenvironment"><strong>source environment</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ssl"><strong>ssl</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertDir"><strong>ssl CA certDir</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertFile"><strong>ssl CA certFile</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslciphers"><strong>ssl ciphers</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslclientcert"><strong>ssl client cert</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslclientkey"><strong>ssl client key</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslcompatibility"><strong>ssl compatibility</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>ssl hosts</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>ssl hosts resign</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireclientcert"><strong>ssl require clientcert</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireservercert"><strong>ssl require servercert</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslservercert"><strong>ssl server cert</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslserverkey"><strong>ssl server key</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslversion"><strong>ssl version</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcache"><strong>stat cache</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcachesize"><strong>stat cache size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#stripdot"><strong>strip dot</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syslog"><strong>syslog</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syslogonly"><strong>syslog only</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#templatehomedir"><strong>template homedir</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#templateshell"><strong>template shell</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timeoffset"><strong>time offset</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timeserver"><strong>time server</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#timestamplogs"><strong>timestamp logs</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>unix password sync</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixrealname"><strong>unix realname</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#updateencrypted"><strong>update encrypted</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#userhosts"><strong>use rhosts</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamelevel"><strong>username level</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>username map</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#utmpdirectory"><strong>utmp directory</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>valid chars</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winbindcachetime"><strong>winbind cache time</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winbindgid"><strong>winbind gid</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winbinduid"><strong>winbind uid</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winshook"><strong>wins hook</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsproxy"><strong>wins proxy</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins server</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>wins support</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeraw"><strong>write raw</strong></a> -<p></dl> -<p><a name="COMPLETELISTOFSERVICEPARAMETERS"></a> -<h2>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</h2> - -<p>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section of each -parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms. -<p><dl> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#adminusers"><strong>admin users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>allow hosts</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#alternatepermissions"><strong>alternate permissions</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#available"><strong>available</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#blockinglocks"><strong>blocking locks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browsable"><strong>browsable</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browseable"><strong>browseable</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>case sensitive</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesignames"><strong>casesignames</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#comment"><strong>comment</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#copy"><strong>copy</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>create mask</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>create mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultcase"><strong>default case</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deletereadonly"><strong>delete readonly</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deletevetofiles"><strong>delete veto files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#denyhosts"><strong>deny hosts</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directory"><strong>directory</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>directory mask</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>directory mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorysecuritymask"><strong>directory security mask</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dontdescend"><strong>dont descend</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dosfiletimeresolution"><strong>dos filetime resolution</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#dosfiletimes"><strong>dos filetimes</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#exec"><strong>exec</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fakedirectorycreatetimes"><strong>fake directory create times</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fakeoplocks"><strong>fake oplocks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#followsymlinks"><strong>follow symlinks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>force create mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>force directory mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorysecuritymode"><strong>force directory security mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcegroup"><strong>force group</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcesecuritymode"><strong>force security mode</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forceuser"><strong>force user</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#fstype"><strong>fstype</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#group"><strong>group</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest ok</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>guest only</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidedotfiles"><strong>hide dot files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>hide files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>hosts allow</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>hosts deny</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#include"><strong>include</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#inheritpermissions"><strong>inherit permissions</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>invalid users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#level2oplocks"><strong>level2 oplocks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#locking"><strong>locking</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>lppause command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcommand"><strong>lpq command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpresumecommand"><strong>lpresume command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lprmcommand"><strong>lprm command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicoutput"><strong>magic output</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>magic script</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglecase"><strong>mangle case</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglelocks"><strong>mangle locks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mangledmap"><strong>mangled map</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglednames"><strong>mangled names</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglingchar"><strong>mangling char</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maparchive"><strong>map archive</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maphidden"><strong>map hidden</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#mapsystem"><strong>map system</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxconnections"><strong>max connections</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minprintspace"><strong>min print space</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#onlyguest"><strong>only guest</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#onlyuser"><strong>only user</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplockcontentionlimit"><strong>oplock contention limit</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>postexec</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postscript"><strong>postscript</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexecclose"><strong>preexec close</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecase"><strong>preserve case</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcommand"><strong>print command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printok"><strong>print ok</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>printable</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printer"><strong>printer</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printeradmin"><strong>printer admin</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriver"><strong>printer driver</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverlocation"><strong>printer driver location</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printername"><strong>printer name</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#public"><strong>public</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#queuepausecommand"><strong>queuepause command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#queueresumecommand"><strong>queueresume command</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readlist"><strong>read list</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read only</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpostexec"><strong>root postexec</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpreexec"><strong>root preexec</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpreexecclose"><strong>root preexec close</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securitymask"><strong>security mask</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#setdirectory"><strong>set directory</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sharemodes"><strong>share modes</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#shortpreservecase"><strong>short preserve case</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#status"><strong>status</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictlocking"><strong>strict locking</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>strict sync</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syncalways"><strong>sync always</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>username</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#users"><strong>users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#utmp"><strong>utmp</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>valid users</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>veto files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetooplockfiles"><strong>veto oplock files</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#volume"><strong>volume</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>wide links</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writable"><strong>writable</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writecachesize"><strong>write cache size</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writelist"><strong>write list</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeok"><strong>write ok</strong></a> -<p><li > <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>writeable</strong></a> -<p></dl> -<p><a name="EXPLANATIONOFEACHPARAMETER"></a> -<h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2> - -<p><dl> -<p><a name="adduserscript"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>add user script (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <em>AS ROOT</em> by -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a> under special circumstances decribed -below. -<p>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all -users accessing files on this server. For sites that use Windows NT -account databases as their primary user database creating these users -and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows NT PDC is an -onerous task. This option allows <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to create -the required UNIX users <em>ON DEMAND</em> when a user accesses the Samba -server. -<p>In order to use this option, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> must be set to -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>security=server</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>security=domain</strong></a> and <strong>"add user script"</strong> -must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user -given one argument of <strong>%u</strong>, which expands into the UNIX user name to -create. -<p>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at -<em>"login"</em>(session setup in the SMB protocol) time, -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> contacts the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password -server</strong></a> and attempts to authenticate the given user -with the given password. If the authentication succeeds then -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX -password database to map the Windows user into. If this lookup fails, -and <strong>"add user script"</strong> is set then <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will -call the specified script <em>AS ROOT</em>, expanding any <strong>%u</strong> argument -to be the user name to create. -<p>If this script successfully creates the user then -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will continue on as though the UNIX user -already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to -match existing Windows NT accounts. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>security=server</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>security=domain</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password -server</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#deleteuserscript"><strong>delete user -script</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> add user script = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u</code> -<p><a name="adminusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>admin users (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges -on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the -super-user (root). -<p>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list -will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of -file permissions. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> <br> -<code> no admin users</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> <br> -<code> admin users = jason</code> -<p><a name="allowhosts"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>allow hosts (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>hosts allow</strong></a>. -<p><a name="allowtrusteddomains"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>allow trusted domains (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option only takes effect when the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> -option is set to <strong>server</strong> or <strong>domain</strong>. If it is set to no, -then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than -the one which smbd is running in will fail, even if that domain -is trusted by the remote server doing the authentication. -<p>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to serve resources -to users in the domain it is a member of. As an example, suppose that there are -two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB is trusted by DOMA, which contains -the Samba server. Under normal circumstances, a user with an account -in DOMB can then access the resources of a UNIX account with the same -account name on the Samba server even if they do not have an account -in DOMA. This can make implementing a security boundary difficult. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> allow trusted domains = Yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> allow trusted domains = No</code> -<p><a name="alternatepermissions"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>alternate permissions (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a deprecated parameter. It no longer has any effect in Samba2.0. -In previous versions of Samba it affected the way the DOS "read only" -attribute was mapped for a file. In Samba2.0 a file is marked "read only" -if the UNIX file does not have the 'w' bit set for the owner of the file, -regardless if the owner of the file is the currently logged on user or not. -<p><a name="announceas"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>announce as (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies what type of server <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list. By default -this is set to Windows NT. The valid options are : "NT", which is a -synonym for "NT Server", "NT Server", "NT Workstation", "Win95" or -"WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 -and Windows for Workgroups respectively. Do not change this parameter -unless you have a specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server -as this may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers correctly. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> announce as = NT Server</code> -<p><strong>Example</strong> -<code> announce as = Win95</code> -<p><a name="announceversion"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>announce version (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use -when announcing itself as a server. The default is 4.2. Do not change -this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server -to be a downlevel server. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> announce version = 4.2</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> announce version = 2.0</code> -<p><a name="autoservices"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>auto services (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to -the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services -that would otherwise not be visible. -<p>Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded -then the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters"><strong>"load printers"</strong></a> option is easier. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> no auto services</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> auto services = fred lp colorlp</code> -<p><a name="available"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>available (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter lets you <em>'turn off'</em> a service. If <code>'available = no'</code>, -then <em>ALL</em> attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures -are logged. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> available = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> available = no</code> -<p><a name="bindinterfacesonly"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>bind interfaces only (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces -on a machine will serve smb requests. If affects file service -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and name service <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> -in slightly different ways. -<p>For name service it causes <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to bind to ports -137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> -parameter. <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> also binds to the 'all -addresses' interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes -of reading broadcast messages. If this option is not set then -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will service name requests on all of these -sockets. If <strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong> is set then -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will check the source address of any -packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don't -match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> parameter list. As unicast packets -are received on the other sockets it allows <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> -to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that arrive -through any interfaces not listed in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>"interfaces"</strong></a> list. IP Source address spoofing -does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used -seriously as a security feature for <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>. -<p>For file service it causes <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to bind only to -the interface list given in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> -parameter. This restricts the networks that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> -will serve to packets coming in those interfaces. Note that you -should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or -other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not -cope with non-permanent interfaces. -<p>If <strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong> is set then unless the network address -<em>127.0.0.1</em> is added to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> parameter -list <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> and -<a href="swat.8.html"><strong>swat</strong></a> may not work as expected due to the -reasons covered below. -<p>To change a users SMB password, the <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> -by default connects to the <em>"localhost" - 127.0.0.1</em> address as an SMB -client to issue the password change request. If <strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong> -is set then unless the network address <em>127.0.0.1</em> is added to the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>'interfaces'</strong></a> parameter list then -<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> will fail to connect in it's -default mode. <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> can be forced to -use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its -<a href="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr"><strong>"-r remote machine"</strong></a> parameter, with -<strong>"remote machine"</strong> set to the IP name of the primary interface -of the local host. -<p>The <a href="swat.8.html"><strong>swat</strong></a> status page tries to connect with -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> at the address -<em>127.0.0.1</em> to determine if they are running. Not adding <em>127.0.0.1</em> will cause -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to always show -"not running" even if they really are. This can prevent -<a href="swat.8.html"><strong>swat</strong></a> from starting/stopping/restarting -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> bind interfaces only = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> bind interfaces only = True</code> -<p><a name="blockinglocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>blocking locks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> when -given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region -of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it. -<p>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be -immediately satisfied, Samba 2.0 will internally queue the lock -request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the -timeout period expires. -<p>If this parameter is set to "False", then Samba 2.0 will behave -as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock -request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained. -<p>This parameter can be set per share. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> blocking locks = True</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> blocking locks = False</code> -<p><a name="browsable"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>browsable (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#browseable"><strong>browseable</strong></a>. -<p><a name="browselist"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>browse list(G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will serve a browse -list to a client doing a NetServerEnum call. Normally set to true. You -should never need to change this. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> browse list = Yes</code> -<p><a name="browseable"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>browseable</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available -shares in a net view and in the browse list. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> browseable = Yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> browseable = No</code> -<p><a name="casesensitive"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>case sensitive (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>See the discussion in the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>NAME MANGLING</strong></a>. -<p><a name="casesignames"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>casesignames (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="changenotifytimeout"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>change notify timeout (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>One of the new NT SMB requests that Samba 2.0 supports is the -"ChangeNotify" requests. This SMB allows a client to tell a server to -<em>"watch"</em> a particular directory for any changes and only reply to -the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of -a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> daemon only performs such a scan on each -requested directory once every <strong>change notify timeout</strong> seconds. -<p><strong>change notify timeout</strong> is specified in units of seconds. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> change notify timeout = 60</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> change notify timeout = 300</code> -<p>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes. -<p><a name="characterset"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>character set (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This allows a smbd to map incoming filenames from a DOS Code page (see -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> parameter) to several -built in UNIX character sets. The built in code page translations are: -<p><dl> -<p><li > <strong>ISO8859-1</strong> Western European UNIX character set. The parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code -page 850 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to iso8859-1 -in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done -correctly. -<p><li > <strong>ISO8859-2</strong> Eastern European UNIX character set. The parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code -page 852 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to ISO8859-2 -in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done -correctly. -<p><li > <strong>ISO8859-5</strong> Russian Cyrillic UNIX character set. The parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code -page 866 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to ISO8859-5 -in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done -correctly. -<p><li > <strong>ISO8859-7</strong> Greek UNIX character set. The parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code -page 737 if the <strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to ISO8859-7 -in order for the conversion to the UNIX character set to be done -correctly. -<p><li > <strong>KOI8-R</strong> Alternate mapping for Russian Cyrillic UNIX -character set. The parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code -page</strong></a> <em>MUST</em> be set to code page 866 if the -<strong>character set</strong> parameter is set to KOI8-R in order for the -conversion to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. -<p></dl> -<p><em>BUG</em>. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character set mappings should -be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages, not static. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>client code page</strong></a>. Normally this -parameter is not set, meaning no filename translation is done. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> character set = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> character set = ISO8859-1</code> -<p><a name="clientcodepage"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>client code page (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the DOS code page that the clients accessing -Samba are using. To determine what code page a Windows or DOS client -is using, open a DOS command prompt and type the command "chcp". This -will output the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and -Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western european -releases of the above operating systems is code page 850. -<p>This parameter tells <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> which of the -<code>codepage.XXX</code> files to dynamically load on startup. These files, -described more fully in the manual page <a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage -(1)</strong></a>, tell <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> how -to map lower to upper case characters to provide the case insensitivity -of filenames that Windows clients expect. -<p>Samba currently ships with the following code page files : -<p><dl> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 437 - MS-DOS Latin US</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 737 - Windows '95 Greek</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 850 - MS-DOS Latin 1</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 852 - MS-DOS Latin 2</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 861 - MS-DOS Icelandic</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 866 - MS-DOS Cyrillic</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 932 - MS-DOS Japanese SJIS</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 936 - MS-DOS Simplified Chinese</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 949 - MS-DOS Korean Hangul</strong> -<p><li > <strong>Code Page 950 - MS-DOS Traditional Chinese</strong> -<p></dl> -<p>Thus this parameter may have any of the values 437, 737, 850, 852, -861, 932, 936, 949, or 950. If you don't find the codepage you need, -read the comments in one of the other codepage files and the -<a href="make_smbcodepage.1.html"><strong>make_smbcodepage (1)</strong></a> man page and -write one. Please remember to donate it back to the Samba user -community. -<p>This parameter co-operates with the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid -chars"</strong></a> parameter in determining what characters are -valid in filenames and how capitalization is done. If you set both -this parameter and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> parameter -the <strong>"client code page"</strong> parameter <em>MUST</em> be set before the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> parameter in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> -file. The <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> string will then augment -the character settings in the "client code page" parameter. -<p>If not set, <strong>"client code page"</strong> defaults to 850. -<p>See also : <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validchars"><strong>"valid chars"</strong></a> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> client code page = 850</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> client code page = 936</code> -<p><a name="codingsystem"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>codingsystem (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is used to determine how incoming Shift-JIS Japanese -characters are mapped from the incoming <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code -page"</strong></a> used by the client, into file names in the -UNIX filesystem. Only useful if <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code -page"</strong></a> is set to 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS). -<p>The options are : -<p><dl> -<p><li > <strong>SJIS</strong> Shift-JIS. Does no conversion of the incoming filename. -<p><li > <strong>JIS8, J8BB, J8BH, J8@B, J8@J, J8@H </strong> Convert from incoming -Shift-JIS to eight bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out -codes. -<p><li > <strong>JIS7, J7BB, J7BH, J7@B, J7@J, J7@H </strong> Convert from incoming -Shift-JIS to seven bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out -codes. -<p><li > <strong>JUNET, JUBB, JUBH, JU@B, JU@J, JU@H </strong> Convert from incoming -Shift-JIS to JUNET code with different shift-in, shift out codes. -<p><li > <strong>EUC</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to EUC code. -<p><li > <strong>HEX</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to a 3 byte hex -representation, i.e. <code>:AB</code>. -<p><li > <strong>CAP</strong> Convert an incoming Shift-JIS character to the 3 byte hex -representation used by the Columbia AppleTalk Program (CAP), -i.e. <code>:AB</code>. This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP. -<p></dl> -<p><a name="comment"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>comment (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a -queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via "net -view" to list what shares are available. -<p>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine -name then see the server string command. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> No comment string</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> comment = Fred's Files</code> -<p><a name="configfile"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>config file (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the -default (usually <strong>smb.conf</strong>). There is a chicken and egg problem -here as this option is set in the config file! -<p>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the -parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config -file. -<p>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful. -<p>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded (allowing you -to special case the config files of just a few clients). -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</code> -<p><a name="copy"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>copy (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter allows you to <em>'clone'</em> service entries. The specified -service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any -parameters specified in the current section will override those in the -section being copied. -<p>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and create similar -services easily. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier -in the configuration file than the service doing the copying. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> copy = otherservice</code> -<p><a name="createmask"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>create mask (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>A synonym for this parameter is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>'create mode'</strong></a>. -<p>When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated -according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the -resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. -This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes -of a file. Any bit <em>*not*</em> set here will be removed from the modes set -on a file when it is created. -<p>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' -write and execute bits from the UNIX modes. -<p>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from -this parameter with the value of the "force create mode" parameter -which is set to 000 by default. -<p>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>'directory mode'</strong></a> for details. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>"force create mode"</strong></a> parameter -for forcing particular mode bits to be set on created files. See also -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymode"><strong>"directory mode"</strong></a> parameter for masking -mode bits on created directories. -See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#inheritpermissions"><strong>"inherit permissions"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> create mask = 0744</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> create mask = 0775</code> -<p><a name="createmode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>create mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>create mask</strong></a>. -<p><a name="deadtime"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>deadtime (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number -of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and -it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of -open files is zero. -<p>This is useful to stop a server's resources being exhausted by a large -number of inactive connections. -<p>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is -broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users. -<p>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended -for most systems. -<p>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be -performed. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> deadtime = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> deadtime = 15</code> -<p><a name="debughirestimestamp"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>debug hires timestamp (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a -resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds -microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on. -<p>Note that the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugtimestamp"><strong>debug timestamp</strong></a> -must be on for this to have an effect. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> debug hires timestamp = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> debug hires timestamp = Yes</code> -<p><a name="debugtimestamp"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>debug timestamp (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Samba2.0 debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are -running at a high <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a> these timestamps -can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned -off. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> debug timestamp = Yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> debug timestamp = No</code> -<p><a name="debugpid"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>debug pid (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>When using only one log file for more then one forked smbd-process -there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message. -This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message -headers in the logfile when turned on. -<p>Note that the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugtimestamp"><strong>debug timestamp</strong></a> -must be on for this to have an effect. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> debug pid = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> debug pid = Yes</code> -<p><a name="debuguid"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>debug uid (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected -user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid -and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on. -<p>Note that the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debugtimestamp"><strong>debug timestamp</strong></a> -must be on for this to have an effect. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> debug uid = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> debug uid = Yes</code> -<p><a name="debuglevel"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>debug level (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows the debug level -(logging level) to be specified in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file. This is to -give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system. -<p>The default will be the debug level specified on the command line -or level zero if none was specified. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> debug level = 3</code> -<p><a name="default"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>default (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>A synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#defaultservice"><strong>default service</strong></a>. -<p><a name="defaultcase"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>default case (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a>. Also note -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#shortpreservecase"><strong>"short preserve case"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><a name="defaultservice"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>default service (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected -to if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the -square brackets are <em>NOT</em> given in the parameter value (see example -below). -<p>There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is not -given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an -error. -<p>Typically the default service would be a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>guest ok</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>read-only</strong></a> service. -<p>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that -of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use -macros like <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a> to make a wildcard service. -<p>Note also that any <code>'_'</code> characters in the name of the service used -in the default service will get mapped to a <code>'/'</code>. This allows for -interesting things. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<pre> - - default service = pub + </TT +> + </PRE +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN48" +></A +><H2 +>SPECIAL SECTIONS</H2 +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN50" +></A +><H3 +>The [global] section</H3 +><P +>parameters in this section apply to the server + as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not + specifically define certain items. See the notes + under paraMETERS for more information.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN53" +></A +><H3 +>The [homes] section</H3 +><P +>If a section called homes is included in the + configuration file, services connecting clients to their + home directories can be created on the fly by the server.</P +><P +>When the connection request is made, the existing + sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no + match is found, the requested section name is treated as a + user name and looked up in the local password file. If the + name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is + created by cloning the [homes] section.</P +><P +>Some modifications are then made to the newly + created share:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The share name is changed from homes to + the located username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If no path was given, the path is set to + the user's home directory.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>If you decide to use a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>path=</I +> line + in your [homes] section then you may find it useful + to use the %S macro. For example :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>path=/data/pchome/%S</B +></TT +></P +><P +>would be useful if you have different home directories + for your PCs than for UNIX access.</P +><P +>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number + of clients access to their home directories with a minimum + of fuss.</P +><P +>A similar process occurs if the requested section + name is "homes", except that the share name is not + changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using + the [homes] section works well if different users share + a client PC.</P +><P +>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters + a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense + than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] + section:</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [homes] + writeable = yes + </TT +> + </PRE +><P +>An important point is that if guest access is specified + in the [homes] section, all home directories will be + visible to all clients <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>without a password</I +>. + In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it + would be wise to also specify <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>read only + access</I +>.</P +><P +>Note that the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>browseable</I +> flag for + auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable + flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as + it means setting browseable=no in the [homes] section + will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home + directories visible.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN78" +></A +><H3 +>The [printers] section</H3 +><P +>This section works like [homes], + but for printers.</P +><P +>If a [printers] section occurs in the + configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer + specified in the local host's printcap file.</P +><P +>When a connection request is made, the existing sections + are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, + but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described + above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a + printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see + if the requested section name is a valid printer share name. If + a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning + the [printers] section.</P +><P +>A few modifications are then made to the newly created + share:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The share name is set to the located printer + name</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If no printer name was given, the printer name + is set to the located printer name</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the share does not permit guest access and + no username was given, the username is set to the located + printer name.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Note that the [printers] service MUST be + printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse + to load the configuration file.</P +><P +>Typically the path specified would be that of a + world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on + it. A typical [printers] entry would look like + this:</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +><TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> [printers] + path = /usr/spool/public + guest ok = yes + printable = yes + </TT +></PRE +><P +>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file + are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. + If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have + to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or + more lines like this:</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +> <TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> alias|alias|alias|alias... + </TT +> + </PRE +><P +>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for + your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify + the new file as your printcap. The server will then only recognize + names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain + whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used + simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.</P +><P +>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the + first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, + components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical + bar symbols ('|').</P +><P +>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what + printers are defined on the system you may be able to use + "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list + of printers. See the "printcap name" option + for more details.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN101" +></A +><H2 +>paraMETRS</H2 +><P +>parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</P +><P +>Some parameters are specific to the [global] section + (e.g., <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>security</I +>). Some parameters are usable + in all sections (e.g., <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>create mode</I +>). All others + are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the + following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] + sections will be considered normal. The letter <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>G</I +> + in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the + [global] section. The letter <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>S</I +> + indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific + section. Note that all <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>S</I +> parameters can also be specified in + the [global] section - in which case they will define + the default behavior for all services.</P +><P +>parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may + not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where + there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer + to the preferred synonym.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN111" +></A +><H2 +>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</H2 +><P +>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file + can take substitutions. For example the option "path = + /tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path = + /tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john.</P +><P +>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, + but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they + might be relevant. These are:</P +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +>%S</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%P</DT +><DD +><P +>the root directory of the current service, + if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%u</DT +><DD +><P +>user name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%g</DT +><DD +><P +>primary group name of %u.</P +></DD +><DT +>%U</DT +><DD +><P +>session user name (the user name that the client + wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).</P +></DD +><DT +>%G</DT +><DD +><P +>primary group name of %U.</P +></DD +><DT +>%H</DT +><DD +><P +>the home directory of the user given + by %u.</P +></DD +><DT +>%v</DT +><DD +><P +>the Samba version.</P +></DD +><DT +>%h</DT +><DD +><P +>the internet hostname that Samba is running + on.</P +></DD +><DT +>%m</DT +><DD +><P +>the NetBIOS name of the client machine + (very useful).</P +></DD +><DT +>%L</DT +><DD +><P +>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you + to change your config based on what the client calls you. Your + server can have a "dual personality".</P +></DD +><DT +>%M</DT +><DD +><P +>the internet name of the client machine. + </P +></DD +><DT +>%N</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of your NIS home directory server. + This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have + not compiled Samba with the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>--with-automount</I +> + option then this value will be the same as %.</P +></DD +><DT +>%p</DT +><DD +><P +>the path of the service's home directory, + obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry + is split up as "%N:%p".</P +></DD +><DT +>%R</DT +><DD +><P +>the selected protocol level after + protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, + LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</P +></DD +><DT +>%d</DT +><DD +><P +>The process id of the current server + process.</P +></DD +><DT +>%a</DT +><DD +><P +>the architecture of the remote + machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be + 100% reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, + WinNT and Win95. Anything else will be known as + "UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong then sending a level + 3 log to <A +HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba@samba.org + </A +> should allow it to be fixed.</P +></DD +><DT +>%I</DT +><DD +><P +>The IP address of the client machine.</P +></DD +><DT +>%T</DT +><DD +><P +>the current date and time.</P +></DD +><DT +>%$(<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>envvar</I +></TT +>)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the environment variable + <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>envar</I +></TT +>.</P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +><P +>There are some quite creative things that can be done + with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN201" +></A +><H2 +>NAME MANGLING</H2 +><P +>Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and + Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. + It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.</P +><P +>There are several options that control the way mangling is + performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. + For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program. </P +><P +>All of these options can be set separately for each service + (or globally, of course). </P +><P +>The options are: </P +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +>mangle case= yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +> controls if names that have characters that + aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, + if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled. + Default <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no</I +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>case sensitive = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If + they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed + names. Default <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no</I +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>default case = upper/lower</DT +><DD +><P +>controls what the default case is for new + filenames. Default <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>lower</I +>.</P +></DD +><DT +>preserve case = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls if new files are created with the + case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the + "default" case. Default <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>yes</I +>. + </P +></DD +><DT +>short preserve case = yes/no</DT +><DD +><P +>controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, + that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created + upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" + case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" + to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names + are lowered. Default <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>yes</I +>.</P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +><P +>By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows + NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN234" +></A +><H2 +>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2 +><P +>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect + to a service. The server follows the following steps in determining + if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the + steps fail then the connection request is rejected. If one of the + steps pass then the following steps are not checked.</P +><P +>If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then + steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>If the client has passed a username/password + pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX + system's password programs then the connection is made as that + username. Note that this includes the + \\server\service%<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> method of passing + a username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client has previously registered a username + with the system and now supplies a correct password for that + username then the connection is allowed.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The client's netbios name and any previously + used user names are checked against the supplied password, if + they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding + user.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client has previously validated a + username/password pair with the server and the client has passed + the validation token then that username is used. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If a "user = " field is given in the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file for the service and the client + has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to + the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames + from the "user=" field then the connection is made as + the username in the "user=" line. If one + of the username in the "user=" list begins with a + '@' then that name expands to a list of names in + the group of the same name.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the service is a guest service then a + connection is made as the username given in the "guest + account =" for the service, irrespective of the + supplied password.</P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN253" +></A +><H2 +>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</H2 +><P +>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow trusted domains</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>announce as</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>announce version</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>auto services</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browse list</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change notify timeout</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>character set</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>coding system</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>config file</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>deadtime</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug hires timestamp</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug pid</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug timestamp</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug uid</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug level</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default service</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user script</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dfree command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dns proxy</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain admin group</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain admin users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain groups</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain guest group</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain guest users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain logons</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain master</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>getwd cache</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide local users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>homedir map</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>keepalive</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>load printers</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>local master</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock dir</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock directory</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>log file</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>log level</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon drive</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon path</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon script</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq cache time</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>machine password timeout</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled stack</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max disk size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max log size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max mux</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max open files</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max packet</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max ttl</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max wins ttl</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max xmit</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>message command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min passwd length</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min password length</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min wins ttl</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>name resolve order</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios aliases</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios name</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios scope</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt pipe support</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt smb support</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>null passwords</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ole locking compatibility</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplock break wait time</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>os level</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>panic action</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password level</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>prefered master</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preferred master</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preload</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printcap</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printcap name</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver file</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>private dir</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>protocol</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read bmpx</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read prediction</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read raw</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>remote announce</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>remote browse sync</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>restrict anonymous</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root dir</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>server string</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shared mem size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>smb passwd file</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>smbrun</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket address</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket options</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>source environment</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certDir</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certFile</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl ciphers</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl client cert</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl client key</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl compatibility</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require clientcert</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require servercert</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl server cert</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl server key</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl version</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strip dot</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>syslog</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>syslog only</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>template homedir</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>template shell</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>time offset</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>time server</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>timestamp logs</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password sync</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix realname</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>update encrypted</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use rhosts</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username level</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp directory</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind cache time</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind gid</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>winbind uid</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins hook</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins proxy</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins server</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins support</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write raw</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN710" +></A +><H2 +>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2 +><P +>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section of + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>admin users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow hosts</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>alternate permissions</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>available</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>blocking locks</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browsable</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>browseable</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>casesignames</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>copy</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default case</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete readonly</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete veto files</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>deny hosts</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dont descend</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dos filetime resolution</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dos filetimes</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>exec</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fake directory create times</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fake oplocks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>follow symlinks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>fstype</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>group</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide dot files</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide files</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>include</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit permissions</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>level2 oplocks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>locking</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic output</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangle case</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangle locks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled map</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangled names</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangling char</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map archive</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map hidden</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map system</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min print space</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>only guest</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>only user</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplock contention limit</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postscript</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preserve case</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print ok</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printable</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver location</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer name</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>public</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>queuepause command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>queueresume command</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read list</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read only</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root postexec</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root preexec</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root preexec close</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>set directory</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>share modes</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>short preserve case</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>status</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict locking</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict sync</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>sync always</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto oplock files</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>volume</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writable</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write cache size</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write list</I +></TT +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write ok</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +> </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1053" +></A +><H2 +>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2 +><P +></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDUSERSCRIPT" +></A +>add user script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +> by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> under special circumstances decribed below.</P +><P +>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are + created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites + that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database + creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the + Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> to create the required UNIX users + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ON DEMAND</I +> when a user accesses the Samba server.</P +><P +>In order to use this option, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> + must be set to <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=server</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security=domain</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> + must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX + user given one argument of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +>, which expands into + the UNIX user name to create.</P +><P +>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, + at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd</A +> contacts the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> and + attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the + authentication succeeds then <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> + attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the + Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script + </I +></TT +> is set then <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will + call the specified script <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +>, expanding + any <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> argument to be the user name to create.</P +><P +>If this script successfully creates the user then <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will continue on as though the UNIX user + already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to + match existing Windows NT accounts.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#security" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#deleteuserscript" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user + script</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user + %u</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADMINUSERS" +></A +>admin users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users who will be granted + administrative privileges on the share. This means that they + will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</P +><P +>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in + this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, + irrespective of file permissions.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no admin users</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>admin users = jason</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ALLOWHOSTS" +></A +>allow hosts (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS" +></A +>allow trusted domains (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option only takes effect when the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>security</A +> option is set to + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>server</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain</I +></TT +>. + If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from + a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running + in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server + doing the authentication.</P +><P +>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to + serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As + an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB + is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server. Under normal + circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the + resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the + Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This + can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow trusted domains = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ANNOUNCEAS" +></A +>announce as (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies what type of server + <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +></A +> + will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse + list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options + are : "NT" (which is a synonym for "NT Server"), "NT Server", + "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, + Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups + respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a + specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this + may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers + correctly.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce as = NT Server</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce as = Win95</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ANNOUCEVERSION" +></A +>annouce version (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies the major and minor version numbers + that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default + is 4.2. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific + need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce version = 4.2</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>announce version = 2.0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="AUTOSERVICES" +></A +>auto services (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of services that you want to be + automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful + for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be + visible.</P +><P +>Note that if you just want all printers in your + printcap file loaded then the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>load printers</I +></TT +></A +> option is easier.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no auto services</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>auto services = fred lp colorlp</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="AVAILABLE" +></A +>available (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>available = no</I +></TT +>, then <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ALL</I +> + attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are + logged.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>available = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BINDINTERFACESONLY" +></A +>bind interfaces only (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This global parameter allows the Samba admin + to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve smb requests. If + affects file service <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> and + name service <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> in slightly + different ways.</P +><P +>For name service it causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to bind + to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +>interfaces</A +> parameter. <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd + </B +> also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) + on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages. + If this option is not set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will service + name requests on all of these sockets. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces + only</I +></TT +> is set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will check the + source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets + and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the + interfaces in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list. + As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to refuse to serve names to machines that + send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> list. IP Source address spoofing + does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used + seriously as a security feature for <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +>.</P +><P +>For file service it causes <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> + to bind only to the interface list given in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +> interfaces</A +> parameter. This restricts the networks that + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will serve to packets coming in those + interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines + that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network + interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.</P +><P +>If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +> is set then + unless the network address <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>127.0.0.1</I +> is added + to the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> + and <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +></A +> may + not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</P +><P +>To change a users SMB password, the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> + by default connects to the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>localhost - 127.0.0.1</I +> + address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind interfaces only</I +></TT +> is set then unless the + network address <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>127.0.0.1</I +> is added to the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +> parameter list then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbpasswd</B +> will fail to connect in it's default mode. + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> can be forced to use the primary IP interface + of the local host by using its <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-r <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>remote machine</I +></TT +></I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter, with <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>remote machine</I +></TT +> set + to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat</B +> status page tries to connect with + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> at the address + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>127.0.0.1</I +> to determine if they are running. + Not adding <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>127.0.0.1</I +> will cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to always show + "not running" even if they really are. This can prevent <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> swat</B +> from starting/stopping/restarting <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>bind interfaces only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BLOCKINGLOCKS" +></A +>blocking locks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls the behavior of <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> when given a request by a client + to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the + request has a time limit associated with it.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested + cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally + queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain + the lock until the timeout period expires.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>False</TT +>, then + Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and + will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range + cannot be obtained.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>blocking locks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSABLE" +></A +>browsable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the <A +HREF="#BROWSEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> browseable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSELIST" +></A +>browse list (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> will serve a browse list to + a client doing a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NetServerEnum</B +> call. Normally + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. You should never need to change + this.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>browse list = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="BROWSEABLE" +></A +>browseable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether this share is seen in + the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>browseable = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CASESENSITIVE" +></A +>case sensitive (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the discussion in the section <A +HREF="#AEN201" +>NAME MANGLING</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CASESIGNAMES" +></A +>casesignames (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +>case + sensitive</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT" +></A +>change notify timeout (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This SMB allows a client to tell a server to + "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to + the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of + a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> daemon only performs such a scan + on each requested directory once every <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change notify + timeout</I +></TT +> seconds.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change notify timeout = 60</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change notify timeout = 300</B +></P +><P +>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CHARACTERSET" +></A +>character set (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This allows a smbd to map incoming filenames + from a DOS Code page (see the <A +HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE" +>client + code page</A +> parameter) to several built in UNIX character sets. + The built in code page translations are:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-1</TT +> : Western European + UNIX character set. The parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> be set to code page 850 if the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>character set</I +></TT +> parameter is set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-1</TT +> in order for the conversion to the + UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-2</TT +> : Eastern European + UNIX character set. The parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page + </I +></TT +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> be set to code page 852 if + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> character set</I +></TT +> parameter is set + to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-2</TT +> in order for the conversion + to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-5</TT +> : Russian Cyrillic + UNIX character set. The parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page + </I +></TT +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> be set to code page + 866 if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>character set </I +></TT +> parameter is + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-5</TT +> in order for the conversion + to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-7</TT +> : Greek UNIX + character set. The parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page + </I +></TT +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> be set to code page + 737 if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>character set</I +></TT +> parameter is + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ISO8859-7</TT +> in order for the conversion + to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>KOI8-R</TT +> : Alternate mapping + for Russian Cyrillic UNIX character set. The parameter + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> + be set to code page 866 if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>character set</I +></TT +> + parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>KOI8-R</TT +> in order for the + conversion to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>BUG</I +>. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character + set mappings should be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages, + not static.</P +><P +>Normally this parameter is not set, meaning no filename + translation is done.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>character set = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>character set = ISO8859-1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CLIENTCODEPAGE" +></A +>client code page (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the DOS code page + that the clients accessing Samba are using. To determine what code + page a Windows or DOS client is using, open a DOS command prompt + and type the command <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chcp</B +>. This will output + the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and + Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western + european releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.</P +><P +>This parameter tells <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> + which of the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>codepage.<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>XXX</I +></TT +> + </TT +> files to dynamically load on startup. These files, + described more fully in the manual page <A +HREF="make_smbcodepage.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>make_smbcodepage(1)</B +></A +>, tell <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd</B +> how to map lower to upper case characters to provide + the case insensitivity of filenames that Windows clients expect.</P +><P +>Samba currently ships with the following code page files :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Code Page 437 - MS-DOS Latin US</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 737 - Windows '95 Greek</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 850 - MS-DOS Latin 1</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 852 - MS-DOS Latin 2</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 861 - MS-DOS Icelandic</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 866 - MS-DOS Cyrillic</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 932 - MS-DOS Japanese SJIS</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 936 - MS-DOS Simplified Chinese</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 949 - MS-DOS Korean Hangul</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Code Page 950 - MS-DOS Traditional Chinese</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Thus this parameter may have any of the values 437, 737, 850, 852, + 861, 932, 936, 949, or 950. If you don't find the codepage you need, + read the comments in one of the other codepage files and the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>make_smbcodepage(1)</B +> man page and write one. Please + remember to donate it back to the Samba user community.</P +><P +>This parameter co-operates with the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid + chars</I +></TT +> parameter in determining what characters are + valid in filenames and how capitalization is done. If you set both + this parameter and the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> parameter + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> parameter + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> be set before the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid + chars</I +></TT +> parameter in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> + file. The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> string will then + augment the character settings in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> + parameter.</P +><P +>If not set, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> defaults + to 850.</P +><P +>See also : <A +HREF="#VALIDCHARS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid + chars</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>client code page = 850</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>client code page = 936</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CODINGSYSTEM" +></A +>codingsystem (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is used to determine how incoming + Shift-JIS Japanese characters are mapped from the incoming <A +HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> + </A +> used by the client, into file names in the UNIX filesystem. + Only useful if <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> is set to + 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS). The options are :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SJIS</TT +> - Shift-JIS. Does no + conversion of the incoming filename.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>JIS8, J8BB, J8BH, J8@B, + J8@J, J8@H </TT +> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to eight + bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>JIS7, J7BB, J7BH, J7@B, J7@J, + J7@H </TT +> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to seven bit + JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>JUNET, JUBB, JUBH, JU@B, JU@J, JU@H </TT +> + - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to JUNET code with different shift-in, + shift out codes.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>EUC</TT +> - Convert an incoming + Shift-JIS character to EUC code.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>HEX</TT +> - Convert an incoming + Shift-JIS character to a 3 byte hex representation, i.e. + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>:AB</TT +>.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>CAP</TT +> - Convert an incoming + Shift-JIS character to the 3 byte hex representation used by + the Columbia AppleTalk Program (CAP), i.e. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>:AB</TT +>. + This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP.</P +></LI +></UL +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="COMMENT" +></A +>comment (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a text field that is seen next to a share + when a client does a queries the server, either via the network + neighborhood or via <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net view</B +> to list what shares + are available.</P +><P +>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the + machine name then see the <A +HREF="#SERVERSTRING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> server string</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>No comment string</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>comment = Fred's Files</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CONFIGFILE" +></A +>config file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This allows you to override the config file + to use, instead of the default (usually <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>). + There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set + in the config file!</P +><P +>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed + when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from + the new config file.</P +><P +>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can + be very useful.</P +><P +>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded + (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few + clients).</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="COPY" +></A +>copy (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows you to "clone" service + entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the + current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current + section will override those in the section being copied.</P +><P +>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and + create similar services easily. Note that the service being + copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the + service doing the copying.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>copy = otherservice</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CREATEMASK" +></A +>create mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for this parameter is + <A +HREF="#CREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>When a file is created, the necessary permissions are + calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX + permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed + with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise + MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> + set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is + created.</P +><P +>The default value of this parameter removes the + 'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.</P +><P +>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created + from this parameter with the value of the <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter which is set to 000 by default.</P +><P +>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the + parameter <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode + </I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + create mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter for forcing particular mode + bits to be set on created files. See also the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mode"</I +></TT +></A +> parameter for masking + mode bits on created directories. See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>create mask = 0744</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>create mask = 0775</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="CREATEMODE" +></A +>create mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a synonym for <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> create mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEADTIME" +></A +>deadtime (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) + represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection + is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes + effect if the number of open files is zero.</P +><P +>This is useful to stop a server's resources being + exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.</P +><P +>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a + connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be + transparent to users.</P +><P +>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes + is recommended for most systems.</P +><P +>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection + should be performed.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deadtime = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deadtime = 15</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP" +></A +>debug hires timestamp (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages + are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this + boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp + message header when turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug hires timestamp = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +></A +>debug timestamp (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped + by default. If you are running at a high <A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug level</I +></TT +></A +> these timestamps + can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping + to be turned off.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug timestamp = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGPID" +></A +>debug pid (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When using only one log file for more then one + forked smbd-process there may be hard to follow which process + outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id + to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug pid = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGUID" +></A +>debug uid (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime + run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the + current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers + in the log file if turned on.</P +><P +>Note that the parameter <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +> must be on for this to have an + effect.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug uid = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEBUGLEVEL" +></A +>debug level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows + the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. This is to give greater + flexibility in the configuration of the system.</P +><P +>The default will be the debug level specified on + the command line or level zero if none was specified.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>debug level = 3</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULT" +></A +>default (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for <A +HREF="#DEFAULTSERVICE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> default service</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULTCASE" +></A +>default case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN201" +> NAME MANGLING"</A +>. Also note the <A +HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>short preserve case"</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DEFAULTSERVICE" +></A +>default service (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a service + which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot + be found. Note that the square brackets are <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> + given in the parameter value (see example below).</P +><P +>There is no default value for this parameter. If this + parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent + service results in an error.</P +><P +>Typically the default service would be a <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#READONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read-only</I +></TT +></A +> service.</P +><P +>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed + to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it + allows you to use macros like <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +> to make + a wildcard service.</P +><P +>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service + used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for + interesting things.</P +><P +>Example:</P +><PRE +CLASS="SCREEN" +><TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +> default service = pub - [pub] - path = /%S - -</pre> - -<p><a name="deleteuserscript"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>delete user script (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <em>AS ROOT</em> by -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a> under special circumstances decribed -below. -<p>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all -users accessing files on this server. For sites that use Windows NT -account databases as their primary user database creating these users -and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows NT PDC is an -onerous task. This option allows <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to delete -the required UNIX users <em>ON DEMAND</em> when a user accesses the Samba -server and the Windows NT user no longer exists. -<p>In order to use this option, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> must be set to -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>security=domain</strong></a> and <strong>"delete user -script"</strong> must be set to a full pathname for a script that will delete -a UNIX user given one argument of <strong>%u</strong>, which expands into the UNIX -user name to delete. <em>NOTE</em> that this is different to the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#adduserscript"><strong>add user script</strong></a> which will work with the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>security=server</strong></a> option as well as -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>security=domain</strong></a>. The reason for this -is only when Samba is a domain member does it get the information -on an attempted user logon that a user no longer exists. In the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>security=server</strong></a> mode a missing user -is treated the same as an invalid password logon attempt. Deleting -the user in this circumstance would not be a good idea. -<p>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at -<em>"login"</em>(session setup in the SMB protocol) time, -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> contacts the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password -server</strong></a> and attempts to authenticate the given user -with the given password. If the authentication fails with the specific -Domain error code meaning that the user no longer exists then -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX -password database that matches the Windows user account. If this lookup succeeds, -and <strong>"delete user script"</strong> is set then <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will -call the specified script <em>AS ROOT</em>, expanding any <strong>%u</strong> argument -to be the user name to delete. -<p>This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way, UNIX -users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT accounts. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>security=domain</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>password server</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#adduserscript"><strong>add user -script</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> delete user script = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u</code> -<p><a name="deletereadonly"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>delete readonly (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not -normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX. -<p>This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where -UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS -semantics prevent deletion of a read only file. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> delete readonly = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> delete readonly = Yes</code> -<p><a name="deletevetofiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>delete veto files (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory -that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>'veto -files'</strong></a> option). If this option is set to False (the -default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or -directories then the directory delete will fail. This is usually what -you want. -<p>If this option is set to True, then Samba will attempt to recursively -delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory. This can -be useful for integration with file serving systems such as <strong>NetAtalk</strong>, -which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto -DOS/Windows users from seeing (e.g. <code>.AppleDouble</code>) -<p>Setting <code>'delete veto files = True'</code> allows these directories to be -transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long -as the user has permissions to do so). -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>veto files</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> delete veto files = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> delete veto files = True</code> -<p><a name="denyhosts"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>deny hosts (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>hosts deny</strong></a>. -<p><a name="dfreecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>dfree command (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The dfree command setting should only be used on systems where a -problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has -been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating -systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry -Ignore" at the end of each directory listing. -<p>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to -calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external -routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill -this function. -<p>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a -directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist -of the string <code>"./"</code>. The script should return two integers in -ascii. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the -second should be the number of available blocks. An optional third -return value can give the block size in bytes. The default blocksize -is 1024 bytes. -<p>Note: Your script should <em>NOT</em> be setuid or setgid and should be -owned by (and writeable only by) root! -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity -and remaining space will be used.</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree</code> -<p>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be: -<p><pre> - - #!/bin/sh - df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' - -</pre> - -<p>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems): -<p><pre> - - #!/bin/sh - /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' - -</pre> - -<p>Note that you may have to replace the command names with full -path names on some systems. -<p><a name="directory"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>directory (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a>. -<p><a name="directorymask"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>directory mask (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS -modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories. -<p>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated -according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the -resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. -This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes -of a directory. Any bit <em>*not*</em> set here will be removed from the -modes set on a directory when it is created. -<p>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' -write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the -directory to modify it. -<p>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from -this parameter with the value of the "force directory mode" -parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra mode -bits are added). -<p>See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>"force directory mode"</strong></a> parameter -to cause particular mode bits to always be set on created directories. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmode"><strong>"create mode"</strong></a> parameter for masking -mode bits on created files, and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorysecuritymask"><strong>"directory security mask"</strong></a> -parameter. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#inheritpermissions"><strong>"inherit permissions"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> directory mask = 0755</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> directory mask = 0775</code> -<p><a name="directorymode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>directory mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>directory mask</strong></a>. -<p><a name="directorysecuritymask"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>directory security mask (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified -when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a -directory using the native NT security dialog box. -<p>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed -permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from -being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated -as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change. -<p>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>directory mask</strong></a> parameter. To allow a user to -modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory, set this -parameter to 0777. -<p><em>Note</em> that users who can access the Samba server through other -means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily -useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of -most normal systems will probably want to set it to 0777. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorysecuritymode"><strong>force directory security -mode</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securitymask"><strong>security -mask</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcesecuritymode"><strong>force security mode</strong></a> -parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> directory security mask = <same as directory mask></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> directory security mask = 0777</code> -<p><a name="dnsproxy"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>dns proxy (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Specifies that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS -server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should -treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup -with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying -client. -<p>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so -the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters, -maximum. -<p><a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> spawns a second copy of itself to do the -DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action. -<p>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>wins support</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> dns proxy = yes</code> -<p><a name="domainadmingroup"></a> -<strong>domain admin group (G)</strong> -<p>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished -Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release. -To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for -Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscribe to the -mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by visiting the web page at -<a href="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org/</a> -<p><a name="domainadminusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain admin users (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished -Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release. -To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for -Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscribe to the -mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by visiting the web page at -<a href="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org/</a> -<p><a name="domaingroups"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain groups (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished -Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release. -To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for -Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscribe to the -mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by visiting the web page at -<a href="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org/</a> -<p><a name="domainguestgroup"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain guest group (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished -Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release. -To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for -Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscribe to the -mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by visiting the web page at -<a href="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org/</a> -<p><a name="domainguestusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain guest users (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is an <strong>EXPERIMENTAL</strong> parameter that is part of the unfinished -Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may be removed in a later release. -To work with the latest code builds that may have more support for -Samba NT Domain Controller functionality please subscribe to the -mailing list <strong>Samba-ntdom</strong> available by visiting the web page at -<a href="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org/</a> -<p><a name="domainlogons"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain logons (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If set to true, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain -logons for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> it is in. For more -details on setting up this feature see the file DOMAINS.txt in the -Samba documentation directory <code>docs/</code> shipped with the source code. -<p>Note that Win95/98 Domain logons are <em>NOT</em> the same as Windows -NT Domain logons. NT Domain logons require a Primary Domain Controller -(PDC) for the Domain. It is intended that in a future release Samba -will be able to provide this functionality for Windows NT clients -also. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> domain logons = no</code> -<p><a name="domainmaster"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>domain master (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Tell <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to enable WAN-wide browse list -collation. Setting this option causes <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to -claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a -domain master browser for its given -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a>. Local master browsers in the same -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> on broadcast-isolated subnets will give -this <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> their local browse lists, and then -ask <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> for a complete copy of the browse list -for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact -their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse -list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet. -<p>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to -claim this <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> specific special NetBIOS -name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> by default (i.e. there is no way to -prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This means that -if this parameter is set and <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> claims the -special name for a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>workgroup</strong></a> before a Windows NT -PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely -and may fail. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> domain master = no</code> -<p><a name="dontdescend"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>dont descend (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>There are certain directories on some systems (e.g., the <code>/proc</code> tree -under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are -infinitely deep (recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a -comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always show -as empty. -<p>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont -descend" entries. For example you may need <code>"./proc"</code> instead of -just <code>"/proc"</code>. Experimentation is the best policy :-) -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none (i.e., all directories are OK to descend)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> dont descend = /proc,/dev</code> -<p><a name="dosfiletimeresolution"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>dos filetime resolution (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on -time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share -causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second -boundary when a query call that requires one second resolution is made -to <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>. -<p>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ -when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a share, -Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file -has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a -one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As -the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a -timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not -match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting -this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is -happy. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> dos filetime resolution = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> dos filetime resolution = True</code> -<p><a name="dosfiletimes"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>dos filetimes (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change -the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file -or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba runs with POSIX -semantics and refuses to change the timestamp on a file if the user -smbd is acting on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option -to True allows DOS semantics and smbd will change the file timestamp as -DOS requires. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> dos filetimes = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> dos filetimes = True</code> -<p><a name="encryptpasswords"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>encrypt passwords (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated -with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above and also -Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a -registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in Samba see the -file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation directory <code>docs/</code> -shipped with the source code. -<p>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> must either have access to a local -<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a> file (see the -<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a> program for information on -how to set up and maintain this file), or set the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security=</strong></a> parameter to either -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"server"</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"domain"</strong></a> which causes -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to authenticate against another server. -<p><a name="exec"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>exec (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a>. -<p><a name="fakedirectorycreatetimes"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>fake directory create times (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files -and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change -time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of -the various times Unix does keep. Setting this parameter for a share -causes Samba to always report midnight 1-1-1980 as the create time for -directories. -<p>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ -when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated makefiles have -the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a make -rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE compares timestamps it -uses the creation time when examining a directory. Thus the object -directory will be created if it does not exist, but once it does exist -it will always have an earlier timestamp than the object files it -contains. -<p>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by -Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or deleted in the -directory. NMAKE therefore finds all object files in the object -directory bar the last one built are out of date compared to the -directory and rebuilds them. Enabling this option ensures directories -always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as -expected. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> fake directory create times = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> fake directory create times = True</code> -<p><a name="fakeoplocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>fake oplocks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to -locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock -(opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the -only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file -data. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close -operations. This can give enormous performance benefits. -<p>When you set <code>"fake oplocks = yes"</code> <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will -always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the -file. -<p>It is generally much better to use the real <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a> -support rather than this parameter. -<p>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you -know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as -physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big performance -improvement on many operations. If you enable this option on shares -where multiple clients may be accessing the files read-write at the -same time you can get data corruption. Use this option carefully! -<p>This option is disabled by default. -<p><a name="followsymlinks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>follow symlinks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> from following symbolic links in a -particular share. Setting this parameter to <em>"No"</em> prevents any file -or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user -will get an error). This option is very useful to stop users from -adding a symbolic link to <code>/etc/passwd</code> in their home directory for -instance. However it will slow filename lookups down slightly. -<p>This option is enabled (i.e. <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will follow -symbolic links) by default. -<p><a name="forcecreatemode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force create mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will -<em>*always*</em> be set on a file by Samba. This is done by bitwise -'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created -or having its permissions changed. The default for this parameter is -(in octal) 000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto -the file mode after the mask set in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create -mask"</strong></a> parameter is applied. -<p>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> for details -on masking mode bits on files. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#inheritpermissions"><strong>"inherit permissions"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> force create mode = 000</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force create mode = 0755</code> -<p>would force all created files to have read and execute permissions set -for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for -the 'user'. -<p><a name="forcedirectorymode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force directory mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will -<em>*always*</em> be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by -bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is -being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 0000 which -will not add any extra permission bits to a created directory. This -operation is done after the mode mask in the parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a> is applied. -<p>See also the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a> for -details on masking mode bits on created directories. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#inheritpermissions"><strong>"inherit permissions"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> force directory mode = 000</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force directory mode = 0755</code> -<p>would force all created directories to have read and execute -permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the -read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'. -<p><a name="forcedirectorysecuritymode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force directory security mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when -a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory -using the native NT security dialog box. -<p>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed -permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may -have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be -treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, -the user has always set to be 'on'. -<p>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>force directory mode</strong></a> parameter. To allow -a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory, -with restrictions set this parameter to 000. -<p><em>Note</em> that users who can access the Samba server through other -means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily -useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of -most normal systems will probably want to set it to 0000. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorysecuritymask"><strong>directory security mask</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securitymask"><strong>security mask</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcesecuritymode"><strong>force security -mode</strong></a> parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> force directory security mode = <same as force directory mode></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force directory security mode = 0</code> -<p><a name="forcegroup"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force group (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default -primary group for all users connecting to this service. This is useful -for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will -use the named group for their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning -permissions for this group to the files and directories within this -service the Samba administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these -files. -<p>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended functionality in the following -way. If the group name listed here has a '+' character prepended to it -then the current user accessing the share only has the primary group -default assigned to this group if they are already assigned as a member -of that group. This allows an administrator to decide that only users -who are already in a particular group will create files with group -ownership set to that group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership -assignment. For example, the setting <code>force group = +sys</code> means -that only users who are already in group sys will have their default -primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All -other users will retain their ordinary primary group. -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forceuser"><strong>"force user"</strong></a> parameter is also set the -group specified in <strong>force group</strong> will override the primary group -set in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forceuser"><strong>"force user"</strong></a>. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forceuser"><strong>"force user"</strong></a> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> no forced group</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force group = agroup</code> -<p><a name="forcesecuritymode"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force security mode (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when -a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file -using the native NT security dialog box. -<p>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed -permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may -have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be -treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the -user has always set to be 'on'. -<p>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>force create mode</strong></a> parameter. To allow -a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, -with no restrictions set this parameter to 000. -<p><em>Note</em> that users who can access the Samba server through other -means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily -useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of -most normal systems will probably want to set it to 0000. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorysecuritymode"><strong>force directory security -mode</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorysecuritymask"><strong>directory security -mask</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securitymask"><strong>security mask</strong></a> -parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> force security mode = <same as force create mode></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force security mode = 0</code> -<p><a name="forceuser"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>force user (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default -user for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for -sharing files. You should also use it carefully as using it -incorrectly can cause security problems. -<p>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. Thus -clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid -password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the -<code>"forced user"</code>, no matter what username the client connected as. -<p>This can be very useful. -<p>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the primary -group of the forced user to be used as the primary group for all -file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left as the -primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug). -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcegroup"><strong>"force group"</strong></a> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> no forced user</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> force user = auser</code> -<p><a name="fstype"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>fstype (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that -specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> when a client queries the filesystem type -for a share. The default type is <strong>"NTFS"</strong> for compatibility with -Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as "Samba" or -"FAT" if required. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> fstype = NTFS</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> fstype = Samba</code> -<p><a name="getwdcache"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>getwd cache (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm -will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have -a significant impact on performance, especially when the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>widelinks</strong></a> parameter is set to False. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> getwd cache = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> getwd cache = Yes</code> -<p><a name="group"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>group (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcegroup"><strong>"force group"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="guestaccount"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>guest account (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a username which will be used for access to services which are -specified as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>'guest ok'</strong></a> (see below). Whatever -privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to -the guest service. Typically this user will exist in the password -file, but will not have a valid login. The user account <strong>"ftp"</strong> is -often a good choice for this parameter. If a username is specified in -a given service, the specified username overrides this one. -<p>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to -print. Use another account in this case. You should test this by -trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the <code>"su -"</code> -command) and trying to print using the system print command such as -<strong>lpr (1)</strong> or <strong>lp (1)</strong>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> specified at compile time, usually "nobody"</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> guest account = ftp</code> -<p><a name="guestok"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>guest ok (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this parameter is <em>'yes'</em> for a service, then no password is -required to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>guest account</strong></a>. -<p>See the section below on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> for more -information about this option. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> guest ok = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> guest ok = yes</code> -<p><a name="guestonly"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>guest only (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this parameter is <em>'yes'</em> for a service, then only guest -connections to the service are permitted. This parameter will have no -affect if <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>"guest ok"</strong></a> or <a href="smb.conf.5.html#public"><strong>"public"</strong></a> -is not set for the service. -<p>See the section below on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> for more -information about this option. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> guest only = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> guest only = yes</code> -<p><a name="hidedotfiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hide dot files (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with -a dot appear as hidden files. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> hide dot files = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> hide dot files = no</code> -<p><a name="hidefiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hide files(S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are -accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or -directories that match. -<p>Each entry in the list must be separated by a <code>'/'</code>, which allows -spaces to be included in the entry. <code>'*'</code> and <code>'?'</code> can be used -to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards. -<p>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the -Unix directory separator <code>'/'</code>. -<p>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding files. -<p>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it -will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they -are scanned. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidedotfiles"><strong>"hide dot files"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>"veto -files"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default</strong> -<pre> - - No files or directories are hidden by this option (dot files are - hidden by default because of the "hide dot files" option). - -</pre> - -<p><strong>Example</strong> -<code> hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</code> -<p>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh SMB client -(DAVE) available from <a href="http://www.thursby.com"><strong>Thursby</strong></a> creates for -internal use, and also still hides all files beginning with a dot. -<p><a name="hidelocalusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hide local users(G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) -from remote clients. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> hide local users = No</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> hide local users = Yes</code> -<p><a name="homedirmap"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>homedir map (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>"nis homedir"</strong></a> is true, and -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> is also acting as a Win95/98 <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon -server</strong></a> then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) -map from which the server for the user's home directory should be -extracted. At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is -understood. The form of the map is: -<p><code>username server:/some/file/system</code> -<p>and the program will extract the servername from before the first -<code>':'</code>. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes -with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps. -<p>NB: A working NIS is required on the system for this option to work. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nishomedir"><strong>"nis homedir"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>domain -logons</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> homedir map = auto.home</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> homedir map = amd.homedir</code> -<p><a name="hostsallow"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hosts allow (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>A synonym for this parameter is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>'allow hosts'</strong></a> -<p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which -are permitted to access a service. -<p>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section then it will -apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service -has a different setting. -<p>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For example, you could -restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something -like <code>"allow hosts = 150.203.5."</code>. The full syntax of the list is -described in the man page <strong>hosts_access (5)</strong>. Note that this man -page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will -be given here also. -<p>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always be allowed -access unless specifically denied by a "hosts deny" option. -<p>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup -names if your system supports netgroups. The <em>EXCEPT</em> keyword can also -be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide -some help: -<p><strong>Example 1</strong>: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.* except one -<p><code> hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</code> -<p><strong>Example 2</strong>: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask -<p><code> hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</code> -<p><strong>Example 3</strong>: allow a couple of hosts -<p><code> hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</code> -<p><strong>Example 4</strong>: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but -deny access from one particular host -<p><code> hosts allow = @foonet</code> -<p><code> hosts deny = pirate</code> -<p>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords. -<p>See <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a> for a way of testing your -host access to see if it does what you expect. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au</code> -<p><a name="hostsdeny"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hosts deny (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The opposite of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>'hosts allow'</strong></a> - hosts listed -here are <em>NOT</em> permitted access to services unless the specific -services have their own lists to override this one. Where the lists -conflict, the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>'allow'</strong></a> list takes precedence. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au</code> -<p><a name="hostsequiv"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>hosts equiv (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name -of a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed -access without specifying a password. -<p>This is not be confused with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>hosts allow</strong></a> which -is about hosts access to services and is more useful for guest -services. <strong>hosts equiv</strong> may be useful for NT clients which will not -supply passwords to samba. -<p>NOTE: The use of <strong>hosts equiv</strong> can be a major security hole. This is -because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is -very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the -<strong>hosts equiv</strong> option be only used if you really know what you are -doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and -kids. And only if you <em>really</em> trust them :-). -<p><strong>Default</strong> -<code> No host equivalences</code> -<p><strong>Example</strong> -<code> hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</code> -<p><a name="include"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>include (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file -is included literally, as though typed in place. -<p>It takes the standard substitutions, except <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentP"><strong>%P</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>. -<p><a name="inheritpermissions"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>inherit permissions (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>"force create mode"</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>"force directory mode"</strong></a> -but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. -<p>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, -including bits such as setgid. -<p>New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory. -Their execute bits continue to be determined by -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maparchive"><strong>"map archive"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maphidden"><strong>"map hidden"</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#mapsystem"><strong>"map system"</strong></a> as usual. -<p>Note that the setuid bit is *never* set via inheritance -(the code explicitly prohibits this). -<p>This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, -perhaps several thousand, -to allow a single <strong>[homes]</strong> share to be used flexibly by each user. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorymask"><strong>"directory mask"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcecreatemode"><strong>"force create mode"</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorymode"><strong>"force directory mode"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default</strong> -<code> inherit permissions = no</code> -<p><strong>Example</strong> -<code> inherit permissions = yes</code> -<p><a name="interfaces"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>interfaces (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list -that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NBT -traffic. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all -active interfaces and use any interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are -broadcast capable. -<p>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string can be in -any of the following forms: -<p><dl> -<li > a network interface name (such as eth0). This may include - shell-like wildcards so eth* will match any interface starting - with the substring "eth" -<li > an IP address. In this case the netmask is determined - from the list of interfaces obtained from the kernel -<li > an IP/mask pair. -<li > a broadcast/mask pair. -</dl> -<p>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C -class network) or a full netmask in dotted decmal form. -<p>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP -address or a hostname which will be looked up via the OSes normal -hostname resolution mechanisms. -<p>For example, the following line: -<p><code>interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code> -<p>would configure three network interfaces corresponding to the eth0 -device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. The netmasks of -the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#bindinterfacesonly"><strong>"bind interfaces only"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="invalidusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>invalid users (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this -service. This is really a <em>"paranoid"</em> check to absolutely ensure an -improper setting does not breach your security. -<p>A name starting with a <code>'@'</code> is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first -(if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name -was not found in the NIS netgroup database. -<p>A name starting with <code>'+'</code> is interpreted only by looking in the -UNIX group database. A name starting with <code>'&'</code> is interpreted only -by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be -working on your system). The characters <code>'+'</code> and <code>'&'</code> may be -used at the start of the name in either order so the value -<code>"+&group"</code> means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS -netgroup database, and the value <code>"&+group"</code> means check the NIS -netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the same as -the <code>'@'</code> prefix). -<p>The current servicename is substituted for -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>. This is useful in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> -section. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>"valid users"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> No invalid users</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> invalid users = root fred admin @wheel</code> -<p><a name="keepalive"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>keepalive (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of -seconds between <strong>'keepalive'</strong> packets. If this parameter is zero, no -keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the -server to tell whether a client is still present and responding. -<p>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket being used -has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"><strong>"socket -options"</strong></a>). Basically you should only use this option -if you strike difficulties. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> keepalive = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> keepalive = 60</code> -<p><a name="kerneloplocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>kernel oplocks (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>For UNIXs that support kernel based <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a> -(currently only IRIX but hopefully also Linux and FreeBSD soon) this -parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off. -<p>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>oplocks</strong></a> to be -broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file -that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> has oplocked. This allows complete -data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a -<em>very</em> cool feature :-). -<p>This parameter defaults to <em>"On"</em> on systems that have the support, -and <em>"off"</em> on systems that don't. You should never need to touch -this parameter. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>"oplocks"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#level2oplocks"><strong>"level2 oplocks"</strong></a> -parameters. -<p><a name="ldapfilter"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap filter (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies an LDAP search filter used to search for a -user name in the LDAP database. It must contain the string -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%u</strong></a> which will be replaced with the user being -searched for. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> empty string.</code> -<p><a name="ldapport"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap port (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies the TCP port number to use to contact -the LDAP server on. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ldap port = 389.</code> -<p><a name="ldaproot"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap root (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies the entity to bind to the LDAP server -as (essentially the LDAP username) in order to be able to perform -queries and modifications on the LDAP database. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaprootpasswd"><strong>ldap root passwd</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> empty string (no user defined)</code> -<p><a name="ldaprootpasswd"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap root passwd (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies the password for the entity to bind to the -LDAP server as (the password for this LDAP username) in order to be -able to perform queries and modifications on the LDAP database. -<p><em>BUGS:</em> This parameter should <em>NOT</em> be a readable parameter -in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file and will be removed once a correct -storage place is found. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#ldaproot"><strong>ldap root</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> empty string.</code> -<p><a name="ldapserver"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap server (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies the DNS name of the LDAP server to use -for SMB/CIFS authentication purposes. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ldap server = localhost</code> -<p><a name="ldapsuffix"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ldap suffix (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is part of the <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> Samba support for a -password database stored on an LDAP server back-end. These options -are only available if your version of Samba was configured with -the <strong>--with-ldap</strong> option. -<p>This parameter specifies the <code>"dn"</code> or LDAP <em>"distinguished name"</em> -that tells <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to start from when searching -for an entry in the LDAP password database. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> empty string.</code> -<p><a name="level2oplocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>level2 oplocks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter (new in Samba 2.0.5) controls whether Samba supports -level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share. In Samba 2.0.5 this parameter -defaults to "False" as the code is new, but will default to "True" -in a later release. -<p>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an -oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only -oplock once a second client opens the file (instead of releasing all -oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, exclusive oplocks). This -allows all openers of the file that support level2 oplocks to cache -the file for read-ahead only (ie. they may not cache writes or lock -requests) and increases performance for many acesses of files that -are not commonly written (such as application .EXE files). -<p>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock writes to -the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed or waited -for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any -read-ahead caches. -<p>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access -to shared executables (and also to test the code :-). -<p>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec. -<p>Currently, if <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>"kernel oplocks"</strong></a> are supported -then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set -to <code>"true"</code>). Note also, the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>"oplocks"</strong></a> parameter must -be set to "true" on this share in order for this parameter to have any -effect. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>"oplocks"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>"kernel oplocks"</strong></a> parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> level2 oplocks = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> level2 oplocks = True</code> -<p><a name="lmannounce"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lm announce (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter determines if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will produce -Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by <strong>OS/2</strong> clients in order -for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter -can have three values, <code>"true"</code>, <code>"false"</code>, or <code>"auto"</code>. The -default is <code>"auto"</code>. If set to <code>"false"</code> Samba will never produce -these broadcasts. If set to <code>"true"</code> Samba will produce Lanman -announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm -interval"</strong></a>. If set to <code>"auto"</code> Samba will not send Lanman -announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them. If it hears -such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a -frequency set by the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm interval"</strong></a>. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lminterval"><strong>"lm interval"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> lm announce = auto</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> lm announce = true</code> -<p><a name="lminterval"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lm interval (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by -<strong>OS/2</strong> clients (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm announce"</strong></a> -parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with -which they will be made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman -announcements will be made despite the setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm -announce"</strong></a> parameter. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lmannounce"><strong>"lm announce"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> lm interval = 60</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> lm interval = 120</code> -<p><a name="loadprinters"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>load printers (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap -will be loaded for browsing by default. See the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>"printers"</strong></a> section for more details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> load printers = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> load printers = no</code> -<p><a name="localmaster"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>local master (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to try and become a -local master browser on a subnet. If set to False then -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will not attempt to become a local master -browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By -default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't -mean that Samba will <em>become</em> the local master browser on a subnet, -just that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will <em>participate</em> in -elections for local master browser. -<p>Setting this value to False will cause <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> -<em>never</em> to become a local master browser. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> local master = yes</code> -<p><a name="lockdir"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lock dir (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>"lock directory"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="lockdirectory"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lock directory (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. -The lock files are used to implement the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maxconnections"><strong>"max -connections"</strong></a> option. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> lock directory = /tmp/samba</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> lock directory = /usr/local/samba/var/locks</code> -<p><a name="locking"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>locking (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server -in response to lock requests from the client. -<p>If <code>"locking = no"</code>, all lock and unlock requests will appear to -succeed and all lock queries will indicate that the queried lock is -clear. -<p>If <code>"locking = yes"</code>, real locking will be performed by the server. -<p>This option <em>may</em> be useful for read-only filesystems which <em>may</em> -not need locking (such as cdrom drives), although setting this -parameter of <code>"no"</code> is not really recommended even in this case. -<p>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific -service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. You should -never need to set this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> locking = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> locking = no</code> -<p><a name="logfile"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>log file (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This options allows you to override the name of the Samba log file -(also known as the debug file). -<p>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have -separate log files for each user or machine. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code> -<p><a name="loglevel"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>log level (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="logondrive"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>logon drive (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory -will be connected (see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#logonhome"><strong>"logon home"</strong></a>) and is only -used by NT Workstations. -<p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> logon drive = h:</code> -<p><a name="logonhome"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>logon home (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or -NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do -<p><code>"NET USE H: /HOME"</code> -<p>from a command prompt, for example. -<p>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have -separate logon scripts for each user or machine. -<p>This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that -roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's home -directory. This is done in the following way: -<p><code>" logon home = \\%L\%U\profile"</code> -<p>This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions made -when a client requests the info, generally in a NetUserGetInfo request. -Win9X clients truncate the info to \\server\share when a user does <code>"net use /home"</code>, -but use the whole string when dealing with profiles. -<p>Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <code>"logon path"</code> was returned rather than -<code>"logon home"</code>. This broke <code>"net use /home"</code> but allowed profiles outside the -home directory. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles -if you use the above trick. -<p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</code> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> logon home = "\\%N\%U"</code> -<p><a name="logonpath"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>logon path (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the home directory where roaming profiles -(NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are stored. Contrary to previous -versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming -profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see -the <code>"logon home"</code> parameter. -<p>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have -separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also specifies -the directory from which the <code>"application data"</code>, (<code>"desktop"</code>, <code>"start menu"</code>, -<code>"network neighborhood"</code>, <code>"programs"</code> and other folders, and their -contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client. -<p>The share and the path must be readable by the user for the -preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT -client. The share must be writeable when the logs in for the first -time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat -and other directories. -<p>Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be -made read-only. It is not advisable that the NTuser.dat file be made -read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to achieve the desired effect (a -<em>MAN</em>datory profile). -<p>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes] -share, even though there is no user logged in. Therefore, it is vital -that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share -(i.e. setting this parameter to <code>\\%N\HOMES\profile_path</code> will cause -problems). -<p>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have -separate logon scripts for each user or machine. -<p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\HOME_DIR\%U\PROFILE</code> -<p><a name="logonscript"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>logon script (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or NT command file -(.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully -logs in. The file must contain the DOS style cr/lf line endings. -Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended. -<p>The script must be a relative path to the <code>[netlogon]</code> service. If -the <code>[netlogon]</code> service specifies a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#path"><strong>path</strong></a> of -/usr/local/samba/netlogon, and logon script = STARTUP.BAT, then the -file that will be downloaded is: -<p><code>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</code> -<p>The contents of the batch file is entirely your choice. A suggested -command would be to add <code>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET /YES</code>, to force every -machine to synchronize clocks with the same time server. Another use -would be to add <code>NET USE U: \\SERVER\UTILS</code> for commonly used -utilities, or <code>NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</code> for example. -<p>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to -the <code>[netlogon]</code> share, or to grant users write permission on the -batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch -files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached. -<p>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have -separate logon scripts for each user or machine. -<p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> logon script = scripts\%U.bat</code> -<p><a name="lppausecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lppause command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job. -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -and job number to pause the print job. One way of implementing this is -by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low priority won't be -sent to the printer. -<p>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A -<code>"%j"</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing=hpux</strong></a>), if the <code>"-p%p"</code> option is added -to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, -i.e. if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will -have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it -will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status. -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the -lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> - Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the -value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>SYSV</code>, in -which case the default is : -<p><code> lp -i %p-%j -H hold</code> -<p>or if the value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>softq</code>, -then the default is: -<p><code> qstat -s -j%j -h</code> -<p><strong>Example for HPUX:</strong> - lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0 -<p><a name="lpqcachetime"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lpq cache time (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the -<strong>lpq</strong> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for -each variation of the <strong>lpq</strong> command used by the system, so if you -use different <strong>lpq</strong> commands for different users then they won't -share cache information. -<p>The cache files are stored in <code>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</code> where xxxx is a hash of -the <strong>lpq</strong> command in use. -<p>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a -previous identical <strong>lpq</strong> command will be used if the cached data is -less than 10 seconds old. A large value may be advisable if your -<strong>lpq</strong> command is very slow. -<p>A value of 0 will disable caching completely. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> lpq cache time = 10</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> lpq cache time = 30</code> -<p><a name="lpqcommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lpq command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to obtain <code>"lpq"</code>-style printer status information. -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -as its only parameter and outputs printer status information. -<p>Currently eight styles of printer status information are supported; -BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ. This covers most UNIX -systems. You control which type is expected using the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing ="</strong></a> option. -<p>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send -the connection number for the printer they are requesting status -information about. To get around this, the server reports on the first -printer service connected to by the client. This only happens if the -connection number sent is invalid. -<p>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. Otherwise -it is placed at the end of the command. -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the <strong>lpq -command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> depends on the setting of printing =</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq %p</code> -<p><a name="lpresumecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lpresume command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print -job. -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -and job number to resume the print job. See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>"lppause -command"</strong></a> parameter. -<p>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A -<code>%j</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer). -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the <strong>lpresume -command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<p>Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the -value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>SYSV</code>, in -which case the default is : -<p><code> lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code> -<p>or if the value of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter is <code>softq</code>, -then the default is: -<p><code> qstat -s -j%j -r</code> -<p><strong>Example for HPUX:</strong> -<code> lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code> -<p><a name="lprmcommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>lprm command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to delete a print job. -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -and job number, and deletes the print job. -<p>If a <code>%p</code> is given then the printername is put in its place. A -<code>%j</code> is replaced with the job number (an integer). -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the -<strong>lprm command</strong> as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code> -<p><strong>Example 1:</strong> -<code> lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j</code> -<p><strong>Example 2:</strong> -<code> lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j</code> -<p><a name="machinepasswordtimeout"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>machine password timeout (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If a Samba server is a member of an Windows NT Domain (see the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>) parameter) then -periodically a running <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> process will try and -change the <strong>MACHINE ACCOUNT PASWORD</strong> stored in the file called -<code><Domain>.<Machine>.mac</code> where <code><Domain></code> is the name of the -Domain we are a member of and <code><Machine></code> is the primary -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>"NetBIOS name"</strong></a> of the machine -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> is running on. This parameter specifies how -often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one -week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member -server. -<p>See also <a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>, and the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>) parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> machine password timeout = 604800</code> -<p><a name="magicoutput"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>magic output (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output -created by a magic script (see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>"magic -script"</strong></a> parameter below). -<p>Warning: If two clients use the same <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicscript"><strong>"magic -script"</strong></a> in the same directory the output file content -is undefined. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> magic output = <magic script name>.out</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> magic output = myfile.txt</code> -<p><a name="magicscript"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>magic script (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be -executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX -script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the -connected user. -<p>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion, -permissions permitting. -<p>If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file -specified by the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#magicoutput"><strong>"magic output"</strong></a> parameter (see -above). -<p>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing -carriage-return-linefeed instead of linefeed as the end-of-line -marker. Magic scripts must be executable <em>"as is"</em> on the host, -which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS -end. -<p>Magic scripts are <em>EXPERIMENTAL</em> and should <em>NOT</em> be relied upon. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> None. Magic scripts disabled.</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> magic script = user.csh</code> -<p><a name="manglecase"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangle case (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="manglelocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangle locks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option is was introduced with Samba 2.0.4 and above and has been -removed in Samba 2.0.6 as Samba now dynamically configures such things -on 32 bit systems. -<p><a name="mangledmap"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangled map (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which can -not be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling of names is not always -what is needed. In particular you may have documents with file -extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. For example, under UNIX -it is common to use <code>".html"</code> for HTML files, whereas under -Windows/DOS <code>".htm"</code> is more commonly used. -<p>So to map <code>"html"</code> to <code>"htm"</code> you would use: -<p><code> mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</code> -<p>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <code>";1"</code> off the ends -of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible under some UNIXs). To do -this use a map of (*;1 *). -<p><strong>default:</strong> -<code> no mangled map</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> mangled map = (*;1 *)</code> -<p><a name="manglednames"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangled names (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to -DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS -names should simply be ignored. -<p>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a> for details -on how to control the mangling process. -<p>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows: -<p><dl> -<p><li > The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the -rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and -appear as the first (up to) five characters of the mangled name. -<p><li > A tilde <code>"~"</code> is appended to the first part of the mangled -name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the -original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final -extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation -only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three -characters. -<p>Note that the character to use may be specified using the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglingchar"><strong>"mangling char"</strong></a> option, if you don't like -<code>'~'</code>. -<p><li > The first three alphanumeric characters of the final extension -are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the extension of the -mangled name. The final extension is defined as that part of the -original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no dots in the -filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except in the case -of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>"hidden files"</strong></a> - see below). -<p><li > Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS -hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, -but with the leading dot removed and <code>"___"</code> as its extension regardless -of actual original extension (that's three underscores). -<p></dl> -<p>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric -characters. -<p>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory -share the same first five alphanumeric characters. The probability of -such a clash is 1/1300. -<p>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX -directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX -filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from -Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names do not -change between sessions. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> mangled names = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> mangled names = no</code> -<p><a name="manglingchar"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangling char (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls what character is used as the <em>"magic"</em> character in -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#manglednames"><strong>name mangling</strong></a>. The default is a <code>'~'</code> but -this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to -whatever you prefer. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> mangling char = ~</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> mangling char = ^</code> -<p><a name="mangledstack"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>mangled stack (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls the number of mangled names that should be -cached in the Samba server <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>. -<p>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are -only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters or contains upper -case characters). -<p>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be -successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. However, large -stack sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller stacks save -memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes). -<p>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long file names, so -be prepared for some surprises! -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> mangled stack = 50</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> mangled stack = 100</code> -<p><a name="maparchive"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>map archive (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to -the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file -has been modified since its last backup. One motivation for this -option it to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches from -becoming executable under UNIX. This can be quite annoying for shared -source code, documents, etc... -<p>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> -parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out -(i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create -mask"</strong></a> for details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> map archive = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> map archive = no</code> -<p><a name="maphidden"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>map hidden (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the -UNIX world execute bit. -<p>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> to be -set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must -include 001). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> -for details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> map hidden = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> map hidden = yes</code> -<p><a name="mapsystem"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>map system (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the -UNIX group execute bit. -<p>Note that this requires the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> to be -set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must -include 010). See the parameter <a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>"create mask"</strong></a> -for details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> map system = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> map system = yes</code> -<p><a name="maptoguest"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>map to guest (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is only useful in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> modes -other than <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security=share"</strong></a> - i.e. user, -server, and domain. -<p>This parameter can take three different values, which tell -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> what to do with user login requests that -don't match a valid UNIX user in some way. -<p>The three settings are : -<p><dl> -<p><li > <strong>"Never"</strong> - Means user login requests with an invalid password -are rejected. This is the default. -<p><li > <strong>"Bad User"</strong> - Means user logins with an invalid password are -rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is -treated as a guest login and mapped into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest -account"</strong></a>. -<p><li > <strong>"Bad Password"</strong> - Means user logins with an invalid -password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. Note that this can -cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their -password will be silently logged on a <strong>"guest"</strong> - and -will not know the reason they cannot access files they think -they should - there will have been no message given to them -that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will -<em>*hate*</em> you if you set the <strong>"map to guest"</strong> parameter -this way :-). -<p></dl> -<p>Note that this parameter is needed to set up <strong>"Guest"</strong> share -services when using <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>security</strong></a> modes other than -share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being -requested is <em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has -successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make -authentication decisions at the correct time (connection to the -share) for <strong>"Guest"</strong> shares. -<p>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this parameter -maps to the old compile-time setting of the GUEST_SESSSETUP value -in local.h. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> map to guest = Never</code> - <strong>Example</strong>: -<code> map to guest = Bad User</code> -<p><a name="maxconnections"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max connections (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service -to be limited. If <strong>"max connections"</strong> is greater than 0 then -connections will be refused if this number of connections to the -service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of -connections may be made. -<p>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files -will be stored in the directory specified by the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lockdirectory"><strong>"lock -directory"</strong></a> option. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max connections = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> max connections = 10</code> -<p><a name="maxdisksize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max disk size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of -disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be -not larger than 100 MB in size. -<p>Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put on -the disk. In the above case you could still store much more than 100 -MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of free disk -space or the total disk size then the result will be bounded by the -amount specified in <strong>"max disk size"</strong>. -<p>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces of -software that can't handle very large disks, particularly disks over -1GB in size. -<p>A <strong>"max disk size"</strong> of 0 means no limit. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max disk size = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> max disk size = 1000</code> -<p><a name="maxlogsize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max log size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log -file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is -exceeded it will rename the file, adding a <code>".old"</code> extension. -<p>A size of 0 means no limit. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max log size = 5000</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> max log size = 1000</code> -<p><a name="maxmux"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max mux (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous -SMB operations that samba tells the client it will allow. You should -never need to set this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max mux = 50</code> -<p><a name="maxopenfiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max open files (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> file serving process may have open for -a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set -very high (10,000) as Samba uses only one bit per unopened file. -<p>The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the -UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter -so you should never need to touch this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max open files = 10000</code> -<p><a name="maxpacket"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max packet (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#packetsize"><strong>"packet size"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="maxttl"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max ttl (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> what the default 'time -to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> is requesting a name using either a -broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to -change this parameter. The default is 3 days. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max ttl = 259200</code> -<p><a name="maxwinsttl"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max wins ttl (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS -server <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>(wins support =true)</strong></a> what the maximum -'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this -parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds). -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minwinsttl"><strong>"min wins ttl"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max wins ttl = 518400</code> -<p><a name="maxxmit"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>max xmit (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated -by Samba. The default is 65535, which is the maximum. In some cases -you may find you get better performance with a smaller value. A value -below 2048 is likely to cause problems. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> max xmit = 65535</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> max xmit = 8192</code> -<p><a name="messagecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>message command (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup -style message. -<p>This would normally be a command that would deliver the message -somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination. -<p>An example is: -<p><code> message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</code> -<p>This delivers the message using <strong>xedit</strong>, then removes it -afterwards. <em>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN -IMMEDIATELY</em>. That's why I have the <code>'&'</code> on the end. If it doesn't -return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages -(they should recover after 30secs, hopefully). -<p>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. The command takes -the standard substitutions, although <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> won't work -(<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentU"><strong>%U</strong></a> may be better in this case). -<p>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply. In -particular: -<p><dl> -<p><li > <code>"%s"</code> = the filename containing the message. -<p><li > <code>"%t"</code> = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server -name). -<p><li > <code>"%f"</code> = who the message is from. -<p></dl> -<p>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your -fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have. -<p>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root: -<p><code>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root < %s; rm %s</code> -<p>If you don't have a message command then the message won't be -delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an -error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries -on regardless, saying that the message was delivered. -<p>If you want to silently delete it then try: -<p><code>"message command = rm %s"</code>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> no message command</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</code> -<p><a name="minprintspace"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>min print space (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available -before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in -kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print -job. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>printing</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> min print space = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> min print space = 2000</code> -<p><a name="minpasswdlength"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>min passwd length (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#minpasswordlength"><strong>"min password length"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="minpasswordlength"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>min password length (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option sets the minimum length in characters of a plaintext password -than smbd will accept when performing UNIX password changing. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchatdebug"><strong>"passwd chat -debug"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> min password length = 5</code> -<p><a name="minwinsttl"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>min wins ttl (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option tells <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> when acting as a WINS -server <a href="smb.conf.5.html#winssupport"><strong>(wins support = true)</strong></a> what the minimum -'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this -parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds). -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> min wins ttl = 21600</code> -<p><a name="nameresolveorder"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>name resolve order (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine -what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP -addresses. The option takes a space separated string of different name -resolution options. -<p>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They cause -names to be resolved as follows : -<p><dl> -<p><li > <strong>lmhosts</strong> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. -If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS -name (see the <a href="lmhosts.5.html"><strong>lmhosts (5)</strong></a> for details) then -any name type matches for lookup. -<p><li > <strong>host</strong> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, -using the system /etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name -resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or -Solaris this may be controlled by the <em>/etc/nsswitch.conf</em> file). -Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being -queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored. -<p><li > <strong>wins</strong> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#winsserver"><strong>wins server</strong></a> parameter. If no WINS server has -been specified this method will be ignored. -<p><li > <strong>bcast</strong> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces -listed in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#interfaces"><strong>interfaces</strong></a> parameter. This is the -least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the -target host being on a locally connected subnet. -<p></dl> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host</code> -<p>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined first, followed -by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system hostname lookup. -<p><a name="netbiosaliases"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>netbios aliases (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This -allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If -a machine is acting as a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>browse server</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a> none of these names will be -advertised as either browse server or logon servers, only the primary -name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"><strong>"netbios name"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> empty string (no additional names)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</code> -<p><a name="netbiosname"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>netbios name (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By -default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name. -If a machine is a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster"><strong>browse server</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a> this name (or the first component -of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are -advertised under. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>"netbios aliases"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> Machine DNS name.</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> netbios name = MYNAME</code> -<p><a name="netbiosscope"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>netbios scope (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This should -not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value. -<p><a name="nishomedir"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>nis homedir (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an -automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a -workstation on demand from a remote server. -<p>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory server, -but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two network hops -would be required to access the users home directory if the logon -server told the client to use itself as the SMB server for home -directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can be very -slow. -<p>This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a -different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon is -running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the Samba -client directly from the directory server. When Samba is returning the -home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homedirmap"><strong>"homedir map"</strong></a> and return the server listed -there. -<p>Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS -system and the Samba server with this option must also be a -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainlogons"><strong>logon server</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> nis homedir = false</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> nis homedir = true</code> -<p><a name="ntaclsupport"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>nt acl support (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> -will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> nt acl support = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> nt acl support = no</code> -<p><a name="ntpipesupport"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>nt pipe support (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> -will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific -<code>IPC$</code> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left -alone. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> nt pipe support = yes</code> -<p><a name="ntsmbsupport"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>nt smb support (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> -will negotiate NT specific SMB support with Windows NT -clients. Although this is a developer debugging option and should be -left alone, benchmarking has discovered that Windows NT clients give -faster performance with this option set to <code>"no"</code>. This is still -being investigated. If this option is set to <code>"no"</code> then Samba -offers exactly the same SMB calls that versions prior to Samba2.0 -offered. This information may be of use if any users are having -problems with NT SMB support. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> nt support = yes</code> -<p><a name="nullpasswords"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>null passwords (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. -<p>See also <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> null passwords = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> null passwords = yes</code> -<p><a name="olelockingcompatibility"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ole locking compatibility (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter allows an administrator to turn off the byte range lock -manipulation that is done within Samba to give compatibility for OLE -applications. Windows OLE applications use byte range locking as a -form of inter-process communication, by locking ranges of bytes around -the 2^32 region of a file range. This can cause certain UNIX lock -managers to crash or otherwise cause problems. Setting this parameter -to <code>"no"</code> means you trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases -correctly. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ole locking compatibility = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> ole locking compatibility = no</code> -<p><a name="onlyguest"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>only guest (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>A synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="onlyuser"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>only user (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with -usernames not in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user=</strong></a> list will be allowed. By -default this option is disabled so a client can supply a username to -be used by the server. -<p>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the -service name. This can be annoying for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> -section. To get around this you could use "<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a> = -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>%S</strong></a>" which means your <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> list -will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name -of the user. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>user</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> only user = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> only user = True</code> -<p><a name="oplocks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>oplocks (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean option tells smbd whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic -locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can -dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files -on Samba servers. It allows the clients to aggressively cache files -locally and you may want to disable this option for unreliable network -environments (it is turned on by default in Windows NT Servers). For -more information see the file Speed.txt in the Samba docs/ directory. -<p>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files on a per share basis. -See the 'veto oplock files' parameter. On some systems oplocks are recognized -by the underlying operating system. This allows data synchronization between -all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local -UNIX process. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>kernel oplocks</strong></a> parameter -for details. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#kerneloplocks"><strong>"kernel oplocks"</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#level2oplocks"><strong>"level2 oplocks"</strong></a> parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> oplocks = True</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> oplocks = False</code> -<p><a name="oplockbreakwaittime"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>oplock break wait time (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. -If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that -can cause an oplock break request, then the client redirector can fail and -not respond to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in -milliseconds) is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an -oplock break request to such (broken) clients. -<p><em>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA -OPLOCK CODE</em>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> oplock break wait time = 10</code> -<p><a name="oplockcontentionlimit"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>oplock contention limit (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a <em>very</em> advanced <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> tuning option to improve -the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file. -<p>In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbd not to grant an oplock even -when requested if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on -the same file goes over this limit. This causes <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to -behave in a similar way to Windows NT. -<p><em>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA -OPLOCK CODE</em>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> oplock contention limit = 2</code> -<p><a name="oslevel"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>os level (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for -browse elections. The value of this parameter determines whether -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> has a chance of becoming a local master -browser for the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>WORKGROUP</strong></a> in the local broadcast -area. The default is zero, which means <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -lose elections to Windows machines. See BROWSING.txt in the Samba -docs/ directory for details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> os level = 20</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> os level = 65 ; This will win against any NT Server</code> -<p><a name="packetsize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>packet size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a deprecated parameter that has no effect on the current -Samba code. It is left in the parameter list to prevent breaking -old <strong>smb.conf</strong> files. -<p><a name="panicaction"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>panic action (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be -called when either <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> or -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> crashes. This is usually used to draw -attention to the fact that a problem occurred. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> panic action = <empty string></code> -<p><a name="passwdchat"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>passwd chat (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This string controls the <em>"chat"</em> conversation that takes places -between <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> and the local password changing -program to change the users password. The string describes a sequence -of response-receive pairs that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> uses to -determine what to send to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>passwd</strong></a> program -and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then -the password is not changed. -<p>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what -local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc). -<p>The string can contain the macros <code>"%o"</code> and <code>"%n"</code> which are -substituted for the old and new passwords respectively. It can also -contain the standard macros <code>"\n"</code>, <code>"\r"</code>, <code>"\t"</code> and <code>"\s"</code> -to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space. -<p>The string can also contain a <code>'*'</code> which matches any sequence of -characters. -<p>Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into -a single string. -<p>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a fullstop -<code>"."</code> then no string is sent. Similarly, is the expect string is a -fullstop then no string is expected. -<p>Note that if the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> -parameter is set to true, then this sequence is called <em>*AS ROOT*</em> -when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without -access to the old password cleartext. In this case the old password -cleartext is set to <code>""</code> (the empty string). -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchatdebug"><strong>"passwd chat -debug"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<pre> - passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*" - -</pre> - -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<pre> - passwd chat = *old*password* %o\n *new*password* %n\n *new*password* %n\n *changed* -</pre> - -<p><a name="passwdchatdebug"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>passwd chat debug (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in -<code>"debug"</code> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from -the passwd chat are printed in the <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> log with -a <a href="smb.conf.5.html#debuglevel"><strong>"debug level"</strong></a> of 100. This is a dangerous -option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> log. It is available to help Samba admins -debug their <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd chat"</strong></a> scripts when calling -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> and should be turned off -after this has been done. This parameter is off by default. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd chat"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd -program"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> passwd chat debug = True</code> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> passwd chat debug = False</code> -<p><a name="passwdprogram"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>passwd program (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. -Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> will be replaced with the -user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the -password changing program. -<p>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <em>"reasonable"</em> -passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case -chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as -Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it. -<p><em>Note</em> that if the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> -parameter is set to <code>"True"</code> then this program is called <em>*AS -ROOT*</em> before the SMB password in the -<a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> file is changed. If this UNIX -password change fails, then <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will fail to -change the SMB password also (this is by design). -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> parameter is -set this parameter <em>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</em> for <em>ALL</em> programs -called, and must be examined for security implications. Note that by -default <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a> is set to -<code>"False"</code>. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#unixpasswordsync"><strong>"unix password sync"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> passwd program = /bin/passwd</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> passwd program = /sbin/passwd %u</code> -<p><a name="passwordlevel"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>password level (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case -passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for -some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 -protocol, but leaves them alone when using COREPLUS! -<p>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be -upper case in passwords. -<p>For example, say the password given was <code>"FRED"</code>. If <strong>password -level</strong> is set to 1, the following combinations would be tried if -<code>"FRED"</code> failed: -<p><code>"Fred"</code>, <code>"fred"</code>, <code>"fRed"</code>, <code>"frEd"</code>, <code>"freD"</code> -<p>If <strong>password level</strong> was set to 2, the following combinations would -also be tried: -<p><code>"FRed"</code>, <code>"FrEd"</code>, <code>"FreD"</code>, <code>"fREd"</code>, <code>"fReD"</code>, -<code>"frED"</code>, <code>..</code> -<p>And so on. -<p>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a -mixed case password will be matched against a single case -password. However, you should be aware that use of this parameter -reduces security and increases the time taken to process a new -connection. -<p>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password -as is and the password in all-lower case. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> password level = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> password level = 4</code> -<p><a name="passwordserver"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>password server (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such as a WinNT box) -with this option, and using <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security = domain"</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security = server"</strong></a> you can get Samba to do all -its username/password validation via a remote server. -<p>This options sets the name of the password server to use. It must be a -NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is different from its -internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS name to the lmhosts -file which is stored in the same directory as the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file. -<p>The name of the password server is looked up using the parameter -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>"name resolve order="</strong></a> and so may resolved -by any method and order described in that parameter. -<p>The password server much be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002" -or the "LM NT 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security -mode. -<p>NOTE: Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is -only as secure as your password server. <em>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD -SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</em>. -<p>Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving. This will -cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server! -<p>The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but -probably the only useful one is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentm"><strong>%m</strong></a>, which means -the Samba server will use the incoming client as the password -server. If you use this then you better trust your clients, and you -better restrict them with hosts allow! -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter is set to -<strong>"domain"</strong>, then the list of machines in this option must be a list -of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>Domain</strong></a> or the character <code>*</code>, as the Samba server is cryptographicly -in that domain, and will use cryptographicly authenticated RPC calls -to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a> is that if you list -several hosts in the <strong>"password server"</strong> option then -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will try each in turn till it finds one -that responds. This is useful in case your primary server goes down. -<p>If the <strong>"password server"</strong> option is set to the character <code>*</code>, -then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the Primary or Backup Domain controllers -to authenticate against by doing a query for the name <code>WORKGROUP<1C></code> -and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP addresses -from the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><strong>name resolution</strong></a> source. -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter is set to -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"server"</strong></a>, then there are different -restrictions that <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a> -doesn't suffer from: -<p><dl> -<p><li > You may list several password servers in the <strong>"password server"</strong> -parameter, however if an <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> makes a connection -to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more -users will be able to be authenticated from this -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a>. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS -protocol when in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security=server"</strong></a> mode -and cannot be fixed in Samba. -<p><li > If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then -you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the -Samba server, as when in -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security=server"</strong></a> mode the network -logon will appear to come from there rather than from the users -workstation. -<p></dl> -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#security"><strong>"security"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> password server = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> password server = *</code> -<p><a name="path"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>path (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service -is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is -where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for -printing. -<p>For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be -readonly and the path should be world-writeable and have the sticky bit -set. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably won't get the -results you expect if you do otherwise. -<p>Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentu"><strong>%u</strong></a> in the path will be replaced -with the UNIX username that the client is using on this -connection. Any occurrences of <a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentm"><strong>%m</strong></a> will be replaced -by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from. These -replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories -for users. -<p>Note that this path will be based on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdir"><strong>"root dir"</strong></a> if -one was specified. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> path = /home/fred</code> -<p><a name="postexec"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>postexec (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is -disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run -as the root on some systems. -<p>An interesting example may be do unmount server resources: -<p><code>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</code> -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>preexec</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none (no command executed)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> postexec = echo "%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)" >> /tmp/log</code> -<p><a name="postscript"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>postscript (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter forces a printer to interpret the print files as -postscript. This is done by adding a <code>%!</code> to the start of print output. -<p>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist in putting -a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then confuses your -printer. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> postscript = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> postscript = True</code> -<p><a name="preexec"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>preexec (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is -connected to. It takes the usual substitutions. -<p>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every -time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example: -<p><pre> - - preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & - -</pre> - -<p>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-) -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexecclose"><strong>preexec close</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>postexec</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> none (no command executed)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> -<p><a name="preexecclose"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>preexec close (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a> should close the service being connected to. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> preexec close = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> preexec close = yes</code> -<p><a name="preferredmaster"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>preferred master (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> is a -preferred master browser for its workgroup. -<p>If this is set to true, on startup, <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the -election. It is recommended that this parameter is used in -conjunction with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#domainmaster"><strong>"domain master = yes"</strong></a>, so -that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> can guarantee becoming a domain -master. -<p>Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts -(whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master -browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and -continuously attempt to become the local master browser. This will -result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing -capabilities. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oslevel"><strong>os level</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> preferred master = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> preferred master = yes</code> -<p><a name="preferedmaster"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>prefered master (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preferredmaster"><strong>"preferred master"</strong></a> for people -who cannot spell :-). -<p><a name="preload"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>preload</strong></strong><dd> -Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#autoservices"><strong>"auto services"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="preservecase"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>preserve case (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the -client passes, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> case. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> preserve case = yes</code> -<p>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>"NAME MANGLING"</strong></a> for a -fuller discussion. -<p><a name="printcommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>print command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command -will be used via a <code>system()</code> call to process the spool -file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to -the host's printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this -be the case. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever -command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been -processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files. -<p>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used verbatim, -with two exceptions: All occurrences of <code>"%s"</code> and <code>"%f"</code> will be -replaced by the appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of -<code>"%p"</code> will be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The spool -file name is generated automatically by the server, the printer name -is discussed below. -<p>The print command <em>MUST</em> contain at least one occurrence of <code>"%s"</code> -or <code>"%f"</code> - the <code>"%p"</code> is optional. At the time a job is -submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <code>"%p"</code> will be -silently removed from the printer command. -<p>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>"[global]"</strong></a> section, the print -command given will be used for any printable service that does not -have its own print command specified. -<p>If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service -nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not -processed and (most importantly) not removed. -<p>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXs from the <code>"nobody"</code> -account. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that -can print and set the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a> in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>"[global]"</strong></a> section. -<p>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are -just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a print -job, print the file, then remove it. Note that <code>';'</code> is the usual -separator for command in shell scripts. -<p><code>print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</code> -<p>You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you -normally print files on your system. The default for the parameter -varies depending on the setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> -parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> - For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP : -<code> print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</code> -<p>For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> SYS or HPUX : -<code> print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</code> -<p>For <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printing"><strong>"printing="</strong></a> SOFTQ : -<code> print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code> -<p><a name="printok"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>print ok (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>printable</strong></a>. -<p><a name="printable"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printable (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this parameter is <code>"yes"</code>, then clients may open, write to and -submit spool files on the directory specified for the service. -<p>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service -path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>"writeable"</strong></a> parameter controls only non-printing -access to the resource. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> printable = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> printable = yes</code> -<p><a name="printcap"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printcap (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcapname"><strong>printcapname</strong></a>. -<p><a name="printeradmin"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer admin (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the -remote administration interfaces offered by MSRPC (usually using a NT -workstation). Note that the root user always has admin rights. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> printer admin = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> printer admin = admin, @staff</code> -<p><a name="printcapname"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printcap name (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default -printcap name used by the server (usually /etc/printcap). See the -discussion of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> section above for -reasons why you might want to do this. -<p>On System V systems that use <strong>lpstat</strong> to list available printers you -can use <code>"printcap name = lpstat"</code> to automatically obtain lists of -available printers. This is the default for systems that define SYSV -at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based -systems). If <strong>"printcap name"</strong> is set to <strong>lpstat</strong> on these systems -then Samba will launch <code>"lpstat -v"</code> and attempt to parse the output -to obtain a printer list. -<p>A minimal printcap file would look something like this: -<p><pre> - - print1|My Printer 1 - print2|My Printer 2 - print3|My Printer 3 - print4|My Printer 4 - print5|My Printer 5 - -</pre> - -<p>where the <code>'|'</code> separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the -second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a -comment. -<p><em>NOTE</em>: Under AIX the default printcap name is -<code>"/etc/qconfig"</code>. Samba will assume the file is in AIX <code>"qconfig"</code> -format if the string <code>"/qconfig"</code> appears in the printcap filename. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> printcap name = /etc/printcap</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</code> -<p><a name="printer"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs -spooled through a printable service will be sent. -<p>If specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> section, the printer -name given will be used for any printable service that does not have -its own printer name specified. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> - none (but may be <code>"lp"</code> on many systems) -<p><strong>Example:</strong> - printer name = laserwriter -<p><a name="printerdriver"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer driver (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to control the string that clients receive when -they ask the server for the printer driver associated with a -printer. If you are using Windows95 or WindowsNT then you can use this -to automate the setup of printers on your system. -<p>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case sensitive) -that describes the appropriate printer driver for your system. If you -don't know the exact string to use then you should first try with no -<strong>"printer driver"</strong> option set and the client will give you a list of -printer drivers. The appropriate strings are shown in a scrollbox -after you have chosen the printer manufacturer. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>"printer driver file"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> - printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L -<p><a name="printerdriverfile"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer driver file (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver definition file, -used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is to be found. If -this is not set, the default is : -<p><code>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY/lib/printers.def</code> -<p>This file is created from Windows 95 <code>"msprint.inf"</code> files found on -the Windows 95 client system. For more details on setting up serving -of printer drivers to Windows 95 clients, see the documentation file -in the docs/ directory, PRINTER_DRIVER.txt. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> None (set in compile).</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> printer driver file = /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</code> -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverlocation"><strong>"printer driver location"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="printerdriverlocation"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer driver location (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer share where to -find the printer driver files for the automatic installation of -drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up to serve printer -drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to -<p><code>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</code> -<p>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, and PRINTER$ -is a share you set up for serving printer driver files. For more -details on setting this up see the documentation file in the docs/ -directory, PRINTER_DRIVER.txt. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> None</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$</code> -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printerdriverfile"><strong>"printer driver file"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="printername"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printer name (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printer"><strong>printer</strong></a>. -<p><a name="printing"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>printing (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted -on your system. It also affects the default values for the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#printcommand"><strong>"print command"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpqcommand"><strong>"lpq -command"</strong></a> <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lppausecommand"><strong>"lppause command"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#lpresumecommand"><strong>"lpresume command"</strong></a>, and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#lprmcommand"><strong>"lprm -command"</strong></a> if specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> -section. -<p>Currently eight printing styles are supported. They are -<strong>"printing=BSD"</strong>, <strong>"printing=AIX"</strong>, -<strong>"printing=LPRNG"</strong>, <strong>"printing=PLP"</strong>, <strong>"printing=SYSV"</strong>, -<strong>"printing="HPUX"</strong>, <strong>"printing=QNX"</strong>, <strong>"printing=SOFTQ"</strong>, -and <strong>"printing=CUPS"</strong>. -<p>To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using -the various options use the <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>"testparm"</strong></a> program. -<p>This option can be set on a per printer basis -<p>See also the discussion in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> section. -<p><a name="protocol"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>protocol (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level -that will be supported by the server. -<p>Possible values are : -<p><dl> -<p><li > CORE: Earliest version. No concept of user names. -<p><li > COREPLUS: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency. -<p><li > LANMAN1: First <em>"modern"</em> version of the protocol. Long -filename support. -<p><li > LANMAN2: Updates to Lanman1 protocol. -<p><li > NT1: Current up to date version of the protocol. Used by Windows -NT. Known as CIFS. -<p></dl> -<p>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation -phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate -protocol. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> protocol = NT1</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> protocol = LANMAN1</code> -<p><a name="public"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>public (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestok"><strong>"guest ok"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="queuepausecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>queuepause command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to pause the printerqueue. -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -as its only parameter and stops the printerqueue, such that no longer -jobs are submitted to the printer. -<p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be -issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 & NT. -<p>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its -place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command. -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the -command as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> queuepause command = disable %p</code> -<p><a name="queueresumecommand"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>queueresume command (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host -in order to resume the printerqueue. It is the command to undo the -behavior that is caused by the previous parameter -(<a href="smb.conf.5.html#queuepausecommand"><strong>"queuepause command</strong></a>). -<p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name -as its only parameter and resumes the printerqueue, such that queued -jobs are resubmitted to the printer. -<p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be -issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 & NT. -<p>If a <code>"%p"</code> is given then the printername is put in its -place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command. -<p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the -command as the PATH may not be available to the server. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> depends on the setting of "printing ="</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> queuepause command = enable %p</code> -<p><a name="readbmpx"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read bmpx (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> -will support the "Read Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used -and defaults to off. You should never need to set this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> - read bmpx = No -<p><a name="readlist"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read list (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a -service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be -given write access, no matter what the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>"writeable"</strong></a> -option is set to. The list can include group names using the syntax -described in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a> parameter. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writelist"><strong>"write list"</strong></a> parameter and -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> read list = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> read list = mary, @students</code> -<p><a name="readonly"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read only (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Note that this is an inverted synonym for -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>"writeable"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="readprediction"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read prediction (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p><em>NOTE</em>: This code is currently disabled in Samba2.0 and -may be removed at a later date. Hence this parameter has -no effect. -<p>This options enables or disables the read prediction code used to -speed up reads from the server. When enabled the server will try to -pre-read data from the last accessed file that was opened read-only -while waiting for packets. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> read prediction = False</code> -<p><a name="readraw"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read raw (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw -read SMB requests when transferring data to clients. -<p>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This -typically provides a major performance benefit. -<p>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size -incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for -these clients you may need to disable raw reads. -<p>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left -severely alone. See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeraw"><strong>"write raw"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> read raw = yes</code> -<p><a name="readsize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>read size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The option <strong>"read size"</strong> affects the overlap of disk reads/writes -with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in -several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and -SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing -the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or -in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before -all the data has been read from disk. -<p>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access -are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much -greater than the other. -<p>The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation has been -done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the -best value will vary greatly between systems anyway. A value over -65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate memory -unnecessarily. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> read size = 16384</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> read size = 8192</code> -<p><a name="remoteannounce"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>remote announce (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to setup <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to -periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an -arbitrary workgroup name. -<p>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote -workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't -work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP -packets to. -<p>For example: -<p><code> remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF</code> -<p>the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself to the two given IP -addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the -workgroup name then the one given in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#workgroup"><strong>"workgroup"</strong></a> parameter is used instead. -<p>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses -of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known -browse masters if your network config is that stable. -<p>See the documentation file BROWSING.txt in the docs/ directory. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> remote announce = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF</code> -<p><a name="remotebrowsesync"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>remote browse sync (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to setup <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to -periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master -browser of a samba server that is on a remote segment. This option -will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across -routed networks. This is done in a manner that does not work with any -non-samba servers. -<p>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to -appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation -rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can -send IP packets to. -<p>For example: -<p><code> remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255</code> -<p>the above line would cause <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to request the -master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to synchronize -their browse lists with the local server. -<p>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses -of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known -browse masters if your network config is that stable. If a machine IP -address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote -machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse -master on it's segment. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> remote browse sync = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255</code> -<p><a name="restrictanonymous"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>restrict anonymous (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean parameter. If it is true, then anonymous access -to the server will be restricted, namely in the case where the server -is expecting the client to send a username, but it doesn't. Setting -it to true will force these anonymous connections to be denied, and -the client will be required to always supply a username and password -when connecting. Use of this parameter is only recommened for homogenous -NT client environments. -<p>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely -on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistant. NT 4.0 likes to use -anonymous connections when refreshing the share list, and this -is a way to work around that. -<p>When restrict anonymous is true, all anonymous connections are denied -no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability of a machine -to access the samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate it's machine -account after someone else has logged on the client interactively. The -NT client will display a message saying that the machine's account in -the domain doesn't exist or the password is bad. The best way to deal -with this is to reboot NT client machines between interactive logons, -using "Shutdown and Restart", rather than "Close all programs and logon -as a different user". -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> restrict anonymous = false</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> restrict anonymous = true</code> -<p><a name="root"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>"root directory"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="rootdir"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root dir (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootdirectory"><strong>"root directory"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="rootdirectory"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root directory (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The server will <code>"chroot()"</code> (i.e. Change it's root directory) to -this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure -operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in -one of the service entries. It may also check for, and deny access to, -soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use -<code>".."</code> in file names to access other directories (depending on the -setting of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#widelinks"><strong>"wide links"</strong></a> parameter). -<p>Adding a <strong>"root directory"</strong> entry other than <code>"/"</code> adds an extra -level of security, but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no -access is given to files not in the sub-tree specified in the <strong>"root -directory"</strong> option, <em>*including*</em> some files needed for complete -operation of the server. To maintain full operability of the server -you will need to mirror some system files into the <strong>"root -directory"</strong> tree. In particular you will need to mirror /etc/passwd -(or a subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed -for printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is -operating system dependent. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> root directory = /</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> root directory = /homes/smb</code> -<p><a name="rootpostexec"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root postexec (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the same as the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>"postexec"</strong></a> parameter -except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting -filesystems (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#postexec"><strong>"postexec"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="rootpreexec"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root preexec (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the same as the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a> parameter except -that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting -filesystems (such as cdroms) before a connection is finalized. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a> -and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#rootpreexecclose"><strong>"root preexec close"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="rootpreexecclose"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>root preexec close (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the same as the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexecclose"><strong>"preexec close"</strong></a> parameter -except that the command is run as root. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexec"><strong>"preexec"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preexecclose"><strong>"preexec close"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="security"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>security (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most -important settings in the <strong>smb.conf</strong> file. -<p>The option sets the <code>"security mode bit"</code> in replies to protocol -negotiations with <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> to turn share level -security on or off. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how) -to transfer user and password information to the server. -<p>The default is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser">"security=user"</a>, as this is -the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows -NT. -<p>The alternatives are <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security = share"</strong></a>, -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalserver"><strong>"security = server"</strong></a> or -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a>. -<p><em>*****NOTE THAT THIS DEFAULT IS DIFFERENT IN SAMBA2.0 THAN FOR -PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF SAMBA *******</em>. -<p>In previous versions of Samba the default was -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>"security=share"</strong></a> mainly because that was -the only option at one stage. -<p>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this setting. When in -user or server level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the -password you type in the "connect drive" dialog box. This makes it -very difficult (if not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as -anyone except the user that you are logged into WfWg as. -<p>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the -UNIX machine then you will want to use <strong>"security = user"</strong>. If you -mostly use usernames that don't exist on the UNIX box then use -<strong>"security = share"</strong>. -<p>You should also use <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequalshare"><strong>security=share</strong></a> if -you want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest -shares). This is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more -difficult to setup guest shares with -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>security=user</strong></a>, see the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to -guest"</strong></a>parameter for details. -<p>It is possible to use <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> in a <em>"hybrid -mode"</em> where it is offers both user and share level security under -different <a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>NetBIOS aliases</strong></a>. See the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosaliases"><strong>NetBIOS aliases</strong></a> and the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#include"><strong>include</strong></a> parameters for more information. -<p>The different settings will now be explained. -<p><dl> -<p><a name="securityequalshare"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>"security=share"</strong></strong><dd> When clients connect to a share level -security server then need not log onto the server with a valid -username and password before attempting to connect to a shared -resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT -will send a logon request with a username but no password when talking -to a <strong>security=share</strong> server). Instead, the clients send -authentication information (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the -time they attempt to connect to that share. -<p>Note that <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> <em>*ALWAYS*</em> uses a valid UNIX -user to act on behalf of the client, even in <strong>"security=share"</strong> -level security. -<p>As clients are not required to send a username to the server -in share level security, <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> uses several -techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf -of the client. -<p>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given -client password is constructed using the following methods : -<p><dl> -<p><li > If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is set, then -all the other stages are missed and only the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest -account"</strong></a> username is checked. -<p><li > Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then -this username (after mapping - see <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>"username -map"</strong></a>), is added as a potential username. -<p><li > If the client did a previous <em>"logon"</em> request (the -SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB -will be added as a potential username. -<p><li > The name of the service the client requested is added -as a potential username. -<p><li > The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a -potential username. -<p><li > Any users on the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> list are added -as potential usernames. -<p></dl> -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is not set, then -this list is then tried with the supplied password. The first user for -whom the password matches will be used as the UNIX user. -<p>If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a> parameter is set, or no -username can be determined then if the share is marked as available to -the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>, then this guest user will -be used, otherwise access is denied. -<p>Note that it can be <em>*very*</em> confusing in share-level security as to -which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access. -<p>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD -VALIDATION"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="securityequaluser"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>"security=user"</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is the default security setting in Samba2.0. With user-level -security a client must first <code>"log-on"</code> with a valid username and -password (which can be mapped using the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#usernamemap"><strong>"username -map"</strong></a> parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter) can also -be used in this security mode. Parameters such as -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#user"><strong>"user"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestonly"><strong>"guest only"</strong></a>, if set -are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this -connection, but only after the user has been successfully -authenticated. -<p><em>Note</em> that the name of the resource being requested is -<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully -authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user -level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown -users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on -doing this. -<p>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD -VALIDATION"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="securityequalserver"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>"security=server"</strong></strong><dd> -<p>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by -passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this fails it -will revert to <strong>"security = user"</strong>, but note that if encrypted -passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to -checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid smbpasswd file -to check users against. See the documentation file in the docs/ -directory ENCRYPTION.txt for details on how to set this up. -<p><em>Note</em> that from the clients point of view <strong>"security=server"</strong> is -the same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>"security=user"</strong></a>. It only -affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in -any way affect what the client sees. -<p><em>Note</em> that the name of the resource being requested is -<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully -authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in server -level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown -users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on -doing this. -<p>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD -VALIDATION"</strong></a>. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> parameter. -and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><a name="securityequaldomain"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>"security=domain"</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This mode will only work correctly if -<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd</strong></a> has been used to add this machine -into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted -passwords"</strong></a> parameter to be set to <code>"true"</code>. In -this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing -it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the -same way that a Windows NT Server would do. -<p><em>Note</em> that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the -account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid -UNIX account to map file access to. -<p><em>Note</em> that from the clients point of view <strong>"security=domain"</strong> is -the same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaluser"><strong>"security=user"</strong></a>. It only -affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in -any way affect what the client sees. -<p><em>Note</em> that the name of the resource being requested is -<em>*not*</em> sent to the server until after the server has successfully -authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in domain -level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown -users into the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#guestaccount"><strong>"guest account"</strong></a>. See the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#maptoguest"><strong>"map to guest"</strong></a> parameter for details on -doing this. -<p><em>BUG:</em> There is currently a bug in the implementation of -<strong>"security=domain</strong> with respect to multi-byte character -set usernames. The communication with a Domain Controller -must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently does not widen -multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus a multi-byte -username will not be recognized correctly at the Domain Controller. -This issue will be addressed in a future release. -<p>See also the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD -VALIDATION"</strong></a>. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> parameter. -and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypted passwords"</strong></a> parameter. -<p></dl> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> security = USER</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> security = DOMAIN</code> -<p><a name="securitymask"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>security mask (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified -when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a -file using the native NT security dialog box. -<p>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed -permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from -being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated -as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change. -<p>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#createmask"><strong>create mask</strong></a> parameter. To allow a user to -modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this -parameter to 0777. -<p><em>Note</em> that users who can access the Samba server through other -means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily -useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of -most normal systems will probably want to set it to 0777. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcedirectorysecuritymode"><strong>force directory security -mode</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#directorysecuritymask"><strong>directory security -mask</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#forcesecuritymode"><strong>force security -mode</strong></a> parameters. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> security mask = <same as create mask></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> security mask = 0777</code> -<p><a name="serverstring"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>server string (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in -print manager and next to the IPC connection in <code>"net view"</code>. It can be -any string that you wish to show to your users. -<p>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine -name. -<p>A <code>"%v"</code> will be replaced with the Samba version number. -<p>A <code>"%h"</code> will be replaced with the hostname. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> server string = Samba %v</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> server string = University of GNUs Samba Server</code> -<p><a name="setdirectory"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>set directory (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If <code>"set directory = no"</code>, then users of the service may not use the -setdir command to change directory. -<p>The setdir command is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks -client. See the Pathworks documentation for details. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> set directory = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> set directory = yes</code> -<p><a name="sharemodes"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>share modes (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This enables or disables the honoring of the <code>"share modes"</code> during a -file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or -write access to a file. -<p>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so they are -simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your UNIX doesn't -support shared memory (almost all do). -<p>The share modes that are enabled by this option are DENY_DOS, -DENY_ALL, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE, DENY_NONE and DENY_FCB. -<p>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled by default. -<p>You should <em>*NEVER*</em> turn this parameter off as many Windows -applications will break if you do so. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> share modes = yes</code> -<p><a name="sharedmemsize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>shared mem size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>It specifies the size of the shared memory (in bytes) to use between -<a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> processes. This parameter defaults to one -megabyte of shared memory. It is possible that if you have a large -server with many files open simultaneously that you may need to -increase this parameter. Signs that this parameter is set too low are -users reporting strange problems trying to save files (locking errors) -and error messages in the smbd log looking like <code>"ERROR -smb_shm_alloc : alloc of XX bytes failed"</code>. -<p>If your OS refuses the size that Samba asks for then Samba will try a -smaller size, reducing by a factor of 0.8 until the OS accepts it. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> shared mem size = 1048576</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> shared mem size = 5242880 ; Set to 5mb for a large number of files.</code> -<p><a name="shortpreservecase"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>short preserve case (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 -syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created -upper case, or if they are forced to be the <code>"default"</code> case. This -option can be use with <a href="smb.conf.5.html#preservecaseoption"><strong>"preserve case -=yes"</strong></a> to permit long filenames to retain their -case, while short names are lowered. Default <em>Yes</em>. -<p>See the section on <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING"><strong>NAME MANGLING</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> short preserve case = yes</code> -<p><a name="smbpasswdfile"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>smb passwd file (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default -the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> smb passwd file= <compiled default></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> smb passwd file = /usr/samba/private/smbpasswd</code> -<p><a name="smbrun"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>smbrun (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This sets the full path to the <strong>smbrun</strong> binary. This defaults to the -value in the Makefile. -<p>You must get this path right for many services to work correctly. -<p>You should not need to change this parameter so long as Samba -is installed correctly. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> smbrun=<compiled default></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> smbrun = /usr/local/samba/bin/smbrun</code> -<p><a name="socketaddress"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>socket address (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for -connections on. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on -the one server, each with a different configuration. -<p>By default samba will accept connections on any address. -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> socket address = 192.168.2.20</code> -<p><a name="socketoptions"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>socket options (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking -with the client. -<p>Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating -systems which allow the connection to be tuned. -<p>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for -optimal performance for your local network. There is no way that Samba -can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must -experiment and choose them yourself. We strongly suggest you read the -appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps -<strong>"man setsockopt"</strong> will help). -<p>You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket -option" when you supply an option. This means you either incorrectly -typed it or you need to add an include file to includes.h for your OS. -If the latter is the case please send the patch to -<a href="mailto:samba@samba.org"><em>samba@samba.org</em></a>. -<p>Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you -like, as long as your OS allows it. -<p>This is the list of socket options currently settable using this -option: -<p><dl> -<p><li > SO_KEEPALIVE -<p><li > SO_REUSEADDR -<p><li > SO_BROADCAST -<p><li > TCP_NODELAY -<p><li > IPTOS_LOWDELAY -<p><li > IPTOS_THROUGHPUT -<p><li > SO_SNDBUF * -<p><li > SO_RCVBUF * -<p><li > SO_SNDLOWAT * -<p><li > SO_RCVLOWAT * -<p></dl> -<p>Those marked with a <code>*</code> take an integer argument. The others can -optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by -default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0. -<p>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION=VALUE for example -<code>SO_SNDBUF=8192</code>. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after -the = sign. -<p>If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be -<p><code>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code> -<p>If you have a local network then you could try: -<p><code>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</code> -<p>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting -IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. -<p>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail -completely. Use these options with caution! -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> socket options = TCP_NODELAY</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code> -<p><a name="sourceenvironment"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>source environment (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter causes Samba to set environment variables as per the -content of the file named. -<p>The file <strong>must</strong> be owned by root and not world writable in order -to be read (this is a security check). -<p>If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character then Samba will -treat that value as a pipe command to open and will set the environment -variables from the oput of the pipe. This command must not be world writable -and must reside in a directory that is not world writable. -<p>The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should be formatted -as the output of the standard Unix env(1) command. This is of the form : -<p>Example environment entry: -<code> SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME=myhostname </code> -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code>No default value</code> -<p><strong>Examples:</strong> -<p><code> source environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh</code> -<p><code> source environment = /usr/local/smb_env_vars</code> -<p><a name="ssl"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If it is set to -"no", the SSL enabled samba behaves exactly like the non-SSL samba. If -set to "yes", it depends on the variables <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>"ssl -hosts"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong></a> -whether an SSL connection will be required. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl=no</code> - <strong>Example:</strong> -<code> ssl=yes</code> -<p><a name="sslCAcertDir"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl CA certDir (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This variable defines where to look up the Certification -Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for each CA -that samba will trust. The file name must be the hash value over the -"Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory is set up is -explained later in this document. All files within the directory that -don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You don't need this -variable if you don't verify client certificates. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs</code> -<p><a name="sslCAcertFile"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl CA certFile (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs. The -certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big file and this -variable points to the file. You will probably only use one of the two -ways to define your CAs. The first choice is preferable if you have -many CAs or want to be flexible, the second is preferable if you only -have one CA and want to keep things simple (you won't need to create -the hashed file names). You don't need this variable if you don't -verify client certificates. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem</code> -<p><a name="sslciphers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl ciphers (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered during SSL -negotiation. You should not set this variable unless you know what you -are doing. -<p><a name="sslclientcert"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl client cert (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>The certificate in this file is used by -<a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> if it exists. It's needed if the -server requires a client certificate. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem</code> -<p><a name="sslclientkey"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl client key (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This is the private key for <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a>. It's -only needed if the client should have a certificate. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem</code> -<p><a name="sslcompatibility"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl compatibility (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This variable defines whether SSLeay should be configured for bug -compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is probably not -desirable because currently no clients with SSL implementations other -than SSLeay exist. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl compatibility = no</code> -<p><a name="sslhosts"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl hosts (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>See <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhostsresign"><strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="sslhostsresign"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl hosts resign (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>These two variables define whether samba will go into SSL mode or -not. If none of them is defined, samba will allow only SSL -connections. If the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslhosts"><strong>"ssl hosts"</strong></a> variable lists -hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name), only these -hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <strong>"ssl hosts resign"</strong> -variable lists hosts, only these hosts will NOT be forced into SSL -mode. The syntax for these two variables is the same as for the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"><strong>"hosts allow"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hostsdeny"><strong>"hosts -deny"</strong></a> pair of variables, only that the subject of the -decision is different: It's not the access right but whether SSL is -used or not. See the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#allowhosts"><strong>"allow hosts"</strong></a> parameter for -details. The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts -outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*). -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl hosts = <empty string></code> -<code> ssl hosts resign = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</code> -<p><a name="sslrequireclientcert"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl require clientcert (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>If this variable is set to <code>"yes"</code>, the server will not tolerate -connections from clients that don't have a valid certificate. The -directory/file given in <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertDir"><strong>"ssl CA certDir"</strong></a> and -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslCAcertFile"><strong>"ssl CA certFile"</strong></a> will be used to look up the -CAs that issued the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be -verified positively, the connection will be terminated. If this -variable is set to <code>"no"</code>, clients don't need certificates. Contrary -to web applications you really <em>*should*</em> require client -certificates. In the web environment the client's data is sensitive -(credit card numbers) and the server must prove to be trustworthy. In -a file server environment the server's data will be sensitive and the -clients must prove to be trustworthy. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl require clientcert = no</code> -<p><a name="sslrequireservercert"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl require servercert (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>If this variable is set to <code>"yes"</code>, the -<a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient</strong></a> will request a certificate from -the server. Same as <a href="smb.conf.5.html#sslrequireclientcert"><strong>"ssl require -clientcert"</strong></a> for the server. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl require servercert = no</code> -<p><a name="sslservercert"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl server cert (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This is the file containing the server's certificate. The server _must_ -have a certificate. The file may also contain the server's private key. -See later for how certificates and private keys are created. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl server cert = <empty string></code> -<p><a name="sslserverkey"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl server key (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This file contains the private key of the server. If this variable is -not defined, the key is looked up in the certificate file (it may be -appended to the certificate). The server <em>*must*</em> have a private key -and the certificate <em>*must*</em> match this private key. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl server key = <empty string></code> -<p><a name="sslversion"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>ssl version (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This is only available if -the SSL libraries have been compiled on your system and the configure -option <code>"--with-ssl"</code> was given at configure time. -<p><em>Note</em> that for export control reasons this code is <em>**NOT**</em> -enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba. -<p>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the SSL protocol -that will be used. <code>"ssl2or3"</code> allows dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 -or v3, <code>"ssl2"</code> results in SSL v2, <code>"ssl3"</code> results in SSL v3 and -"tls1" results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is the -(proposed?) new standard for SSL. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> ssl version = "ssl2or3"</code> -<p><a name="statcache"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>stat cache (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter determines if <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd</strong></a> will use a -cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should -never need to change this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> stat cache = yes</code> -<p><a name="statcachesize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>stat cache size (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter determines the number of entries in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#statcache"><strong>stat -cache</strong></a>. You should never need to change this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> stat cache size = 50</code> -<p><a name="status"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>status (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This enables or disables logging of connections to a status file that -<a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong></a> can read. -<p>With this disabled <a href="smbstatus.1.html"><strong>smbstatus</strong></a> won't be able -to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to -change this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> - status = yes -<p><a name="strictlocking"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>strict locking (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the -server. When this is set to <code>"yes"</code> the server will check every read and -write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can -be slow on some systems. -<p>When strict locking is <code>"no"</code> the server does file lock checks only -when the client explicitly asks for them. -<p>Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important, -so in the vast majority of cases <strong>"strict locking = no"</strong> is -preferable. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> strict locking = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> strict locking = yes</code> -<p><a name="strictsync"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>strict sync (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) -seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to -disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until -the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel disk -buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage. This is very slow -and should only be done rarely. Setting this parameter to "no" (the -default) means that smbd ignores the Windows applications requests for -a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the -operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is -little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many -performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 -explorer shell file copies. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#syncalways"><strong>"sync always"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> strict sync = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> strict sync = yes</code> -<p><a name="stripdot"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>strip dot (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean that controls whether to strip trailing dots off -UNIX filenames. This helps with some CDROMs that have filenames ending -in a single dot. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> strip dot = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> strip dot = yes</code> -<p><a name="syncalways"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>sync always (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always -be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is -false then the server will be guided by the client's request in each -write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write -should be synchronous). If this is true then every write will be -followed by a fsync() call to ensure the data is written to disk. -Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>"strict sync"</strong></a> parameter must be -set to <code>"yes"</code> in order for this parameter to have any affect. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#strictsync"><strong>"strict sync"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> sync always = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> sync always = yes</code> -<p><a name="syslog"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>syslog (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the -system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog -LOG_ERR, debug level one maps onto LOG_WARNING, debug level two maps -onto LOG_NOTICE, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher -levels are mapped to LOG_DEBUG. -<p>This paramter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog. -Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent -to syslog. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> syslog = 1</code> -<p><a name="syslogonly"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>syslog only (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the -system syslog only, and not to the debug log files. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> syslog only = no</code> -<p><a name="templatehomedir"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>template homedir (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>NOTE: this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0. -<p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the -<a href="winbindd.8.html"><strong>winbindd</strong></a> daemon uses this parameter to fill in -the home directory for that user. If the string <code>%D</code> is present it is -substituted with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the string <code>%U</code> -is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> template homedir = /home/%D/%U</code> -<p><a name="templateshell"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>template shell (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>NOTE: this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0. -<p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the -<a href="winbindd.8.html"><strong>winbindd</strong></a> daemon uses this parameter to fill in -the login shell for that user. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> template shell = /bin/false</code> -<p><a name="timeoffset"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>time offset (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to -local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs -that have incorrect daylight saving time handling. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> time offset = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> time offset = 60</code> -<p><a name="timeserver"></a> -<p><p></p><dt><strong><strong>time server (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter determines if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> advertises -itself as a time server to Windows clients. The default is False. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> time server = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> time server = True</code> -<p><a name="timestamplogs"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>timestamp logs (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="debugtimestamp"><strong>"debug timestamp"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="unixpasswordsync"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>unix password sync (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize -the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB -password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is set to true the -program specified in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a> -parameter is called <em>*AS ROOT*</em> - to allow the new UNIX password to be -set without access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password has -change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the -new). By default this is set to <code>"false"</code>. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdprogram"><strong>"passwd program"</strong></a>, <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwdchat"><strong>"passwd -chat"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> unix password sync = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> unix password sync = True</code> -<p><a name="unixrealname"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>unix realname (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter when set causes samba to supply the real name -field from the unix password file to the client. This is useful for -setting up mail clients and WWW browsers on systems used by more than -one person. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> unix realname = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> unix realname = yes</code> -<p><a name="updateencrypted"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>update encrypted (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext -password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd -file to be updated automatically as they log on. This option allows a -site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users -authenticate with plaintext password over the wire, and are checked -against a UNIX account database) to encrypted password authentication -(the SMB challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing -all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the -change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over -to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users -have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd -file this parameter should be set to <code>"off"</code>. -<p>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#encryptpasswords"><strong>"encrypt -passwords"</strong></a> parameter must be set to <code>"no"</code> when -this parameter is set to <code>"yes"</code>. -<p>Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to -smbd must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, -and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> update encrypted = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> update encrypted = yes</code> -<p><a name="userhosts"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>use rhosts (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>If this global parameter is a true, it specifies that the UNIX users -<code>".rhosts"</code> file in their home directory will be read to find the -names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying -a password. -<p>NOTE: The use of <strong>use rhosts</strong> can be a major security hole. This is -because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is -very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the -<strong>use rhosts</strong> option be only used if you really know what you are -doing. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> use rhosts = no</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> use rhosts = yes</code> -<p><a name="user"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>user (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>"username"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="users"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>users (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#username"><strong>"username"</strong></a>. -<p><a name="username"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>username (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which -case the supplied password will be tested against each username in -turn (left to right). -<p>The <strong>username=</strong> line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply -its own username. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where -your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames. In both -these cases you may also be better using the <code>\\server\share%user</code> -syntax instead. -<p>The <strong>username=</strong> line is not a great solution in many cases as it -means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of -the usernames in the username= line in turn. This is slow and a bad -idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. You may get -timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely. -<p>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This parameter does not -restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to -what usernames might correspond to the supplied password. Users can -login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more -damage than if they started a telnet session. The daemon runs as the -user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot -do. -<p>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#validusers"><strong>"valid users="</strong></a> parameter. -<p>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'@'</code> then the name will be -looked up first in the yp netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with -netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database -and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name. -<p>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'+'</code> then the name will be -looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list -of all users in the group of that name. -<p>If any of the usernames begin with a <code>'&'</code> then the name will be -looked up only in the yp netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with -netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the -netgroup group of that name. -<p>Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, -and some clients may time out during the search. -<p>See the section <a href="smb.conf.5.html#NOTEABOUTUSERNAMEPASSWORDVALIDATION"><strong>"NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD -VALIDATION"</strong></a> for more -information on how this parameter determines access to the services. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> The guest account if a guest service, else the name of the service.</code> -<p><strong>Examples:</strong> -<pre> - - username = fred - username = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup - -</pre> - -<p><a name="usernamelevel"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>username level (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, -as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba -tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter -capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX -machine. -<p>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. This -parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase -combinations to try whilst trying to determine the UNIX user name. The -higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower -the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have -strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <code>"AstrangeUser"</code>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> username level = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> username level = 5</code> -<p><a name="usernamemap"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>username map (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of -usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several -purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or -Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map -multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share -files. -<p>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should contain a single -UNIX username on the left then a <code>'='</code> followed by a list of -usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the right may contain -names of the form @group in which case they will match any UNIX -username in that group. The special client name <code>'*'</code> is a wildcard -and matches any name. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023 -characters long. -<p>The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and -comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the <code>'='</code> -signs. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand -side then it is replaced with the name on the left. Processing then -continues with the next line. -<p>If any line begins with a <code>'#'</code> or a <code>';'</code> then it is ignored -<p>If any line begins with an <code>'!'</code> then the processing will stop after -that line if a mapping was done by the line. Otherwise mapping -continues with every line being processed. Using <code>'!'</code> is most -useful when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file. -<p>For example to map from the name <code>"admin"</code> or <code>"administrator"</code> to -the UNIX name <code>"root"</code> you would use: -<p><code> root = admin administrator</code> -<p>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <code>"system"</code> to the UNIX name -<code>"sys"</code> you would use: -<p><code> sys = @system</code> -<p>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file. -<p>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup -database is checked before the <code>/etc/group</code> database for matching -groups. -<p>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double -quotes around the name. For example: -<p><code> tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</code> -<p>would map the windows username <code>"Andrew Tridgell"</code> to the unix -username tridge. -<p>The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys, -and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the <code>'!'</code> to tell Samba -to stop processing if it gets a match on that line. -<p><pre> - - !sys = mary fred - guest = * - -</pre> - -<p>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of -usernames. Thus if you connect to <code>"\\server\fred"</code> and <code>"fred"</code> -is remapped to <code>"mary"</code> then you will actually be connecting to -<code>"\\server\mary"</code> and will need to supply a password suitable for -<code>"mary"</code> not <code>"fred"</code>. The only exception to this is the username -passed to the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"><strong>"password server"</strong></a> (if you have -one). The password server will receive whatever username the client -supplies without modification. -<p>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is -with printing. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting -print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the -print job. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> no username map</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map</code> -<p><a name="utmp"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>utmp (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled -with the option <code>--with-utmp</code>. If set to True then Samba will attempt -to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a -connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the -user connecting to a Samba share. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#utmpdirectory"><strong>"utmp directory"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code>utmp = False</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code>utmp = True</code> -<p><a name="utmpdirectory"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>utmp directory(G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled -with the option <code>--with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is -used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that -record user connections to a Samba server. See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#utmp"><strong>"utmp"</strong></a> -parameter. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever -utmp file the native system is set to use (usually /var/run/utmp on Linux). -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code>no utmp directory</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code>utmp directory = /var/adm/</code> -<p><a name="winbindcachetime"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong>winbind cache time</strong><dd> -<p>NOTE: this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0. -<p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the -<a href="winbindd.8.html"><strong>winbindd</strong></a> daemon will cache user and group -information before querying a Windows NT server again. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> winbind cache type = 15</code> -<p><a name="winbindgid"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong>winbind gid</strong><dd> -<p>NOTE: this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0. -<p>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are -allocated by the <a href="winbindd.8.html"><strong>winbindd</strong></a> daemon. This range of -group ids should have no existing local or nis groups within it as strange -conflicts can occur otherwise. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> winbind gid = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> winbind gid = 10000-20000</code> -<p><a name="winbinduid"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong>winbind uid</strong><dd> -<p>NOTE: this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0. -<p>The winbind uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are -allocated by the <a href="winbindd.8.html"><strong>winbindd</strong></a> daemon. This range of -ids should have no existing local or nis users within it as strange -conflicts can occur otherwise. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> winbind uid = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> winbind uid = 10000-20000</code> -<p><a name="validchars"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>valid chars (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>The option allows you to specify additional characters that should be -considered valid by the server in filenames. This is particularly -useful for national character sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring. -<p>The option takes a list of characters in either integer or character -form with spaces between them. If you give two characters with a colon -between them then it will be taken as an lowercase:uppercase pair. -<p>If you have an editor capable of entering the characters into the -config file then it is probably easiest to use this method. Otherwise -you can specify the characters in octal, decimal or hexadecimal form -using the usual C notation. -<p>For example to add the single character <code>'Z'</code> to the charset (which -is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could do one of -the following -<p><pre> - - valid chars = Z - valid chars = z:Z - valid chars = 0132:0172 - -</pre> - -<p>The last two examples above actually add two characters, and alter the -uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately. -<p>Note that you MUST specify this parameter after the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client -code page"</strong></a> parameter if you have both set. If -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code page"</strong></a> is set after the -<strong>"valid chars"</strong> parameter the <strong>"valid chars"</strong> settings will be -overwritten. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#clientcodepage"><strong>"client code page"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<pre> - - Samba defaults to using a reasonable set of valid characters - for English systems - -</pre> - -<p><strong>Example</strong> -<code> valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304</code> -<p>The above example allows filenames to have the Swedish characters in -them. -<p>NOTE: It is actually quite difficult to correctly produce a <strong>"valid -chars"</strong> line for a particular system. To automate the process -<a href="mailto:tino@augsburg.net"><em>tino@augsburg.net</em></a> has written a package called <strong>"validchars"</strong> -which will automatically produce a complete <strong>"valid chars"</strong> line for -a given client system. Look in the examples/validchars/ subdirectory -of your Samba source code distribution for this package. -<p><a name="validusers"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>valid users (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this -service. Names starting with <code>'@'</code>, <code>'+'</code> and <code>'&'</code> are -interpreted using the same rules as described in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid -users"</strong></a> parameter. -<p>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. If a username -is in both this list and the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a> -list then access is denied for that user. -<p>The current servicename is substituted for -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#percentS"><strong>"%S"</strong></a>. This is useful in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> section. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#invalidusers"><strong>"invalid users"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> No valid users list. (anyone can login)</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> valid users = greg, @pcusers</code> -<p><a name="vetofiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>veto files(S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor -accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a <code>'/'</code>, -which allows spaces to be included in the entry. <code>'*'</code> and <code>'?'</code> -can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS -wildcards. -<p>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must <em>*not*</em> include the -unix directory separator <code>'/'</code>. -<p>Note that the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case sensitive"</strong></a> option is -applicable in vetoing files. -<p>One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be -aware of, is that if a directory contains nothing but files that match -the veto files parameter (which means that Windows/DOS clients cannot -ever see them) is deleted, the veto files within that directory *are -automatically deleted* along with it, if the user has UNIX permissions -to do so. -<p>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it -will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they -are scanned. -<p>See also <a href="smb.conf.5.html#hidefiles"><strong>"hide files"</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#casesensitive"><strong>"case -sensitive"</strong></a>. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> No files or directories are vetoed.</code> -<p><strong>Examples:</strong> -<p>Example 1. -<p><pre> - - - Veto any files containing the word Security, - any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the - word root. - - veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/ - -</pre> - -<p>Example 2. -<p><pre> - - Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server - creates. - - veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ - -</pre> - -<p><a name="vetooplockfiles"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>veto oplock files (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter is only valid when the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#oplocks"><strong>"oplocks"</strong></a> -parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator -to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that -match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the -<a href="smb.conf.5.html#vetofiles"><strong>"veto files"</strong></a> parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> No files are vetoed for oplock grants.</code> -<p><strong>Examples:</strong> -<p>You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily -contended for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench -SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for files -ending in <code>".SEM"</code>. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these -files you would use the line (either in the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#global"><strong>[global]</strong></a> -section or in the section for the particular NetBench share : -<p><code> veto oplock files = /*.SEM/</code> -<p><a name="volume"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>volume (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This allows you to override the volume label returned for a -share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a -particular volume label. -<p>The default is the name of the share. -<p><a name="widelinks"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>wide links (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system -may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the -directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this -parameter controls access only to areas that are outside the directory -tree being exported. -<p>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative effect on your -server performance due to the extra system calls that Samba has to -do in order to perform the link checks. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> wide links = yes</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> wide links = no</code> -<p><a name="winsproxy"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>wins proxy (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a boolean that controls if <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> will -respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may -need to set this to <code>"yes"</code> for some older clients. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> wins proxy = no</code> -<p><a name="winsserver"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>wins server (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) -of the WINS server that <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> should register with. -If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to -the WINS server's IP. -<p>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a -multi-subnetted network. -<p><em>NOTE</em>. You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you -have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly. -<p>See the documentation file BROWSING.txt in the docs/ directory of your -Samba source distribution. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> wins server = </code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> wins server = 192.9.200.1</code> -<p><a name="winshook"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>wins hook (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an -external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary use -for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name -resolution databases such as dynamic DNS. -<p>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script or executable -that will be called as follows: -<p>wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list -<p>The first argument is the operation and is one of "add", "delete", -or "refresh". In most cases the operation can be ignored as the rest -of the parameters provide sufficient information. Note that "refresh" -may sometimes be called when the name has not previously been added, -in that case it should be treated as an add. -<p>The second argument is the netbios name. If the name is not a legal -name then the wins hook is not called. Legal names contain only -letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods. -<p>The third argument is the netbios name type as a 2 digit hexadecimal -number. -<p>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) for the name in seconds. -<p>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses currently -registered for that name. If this list is empty then the name should -be deleted. -<p>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program -"nsupdate" is provided in the examples directory of the Samba source -code. -<p><a name="winssupport"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>wins support (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This boolean controls if the <a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> process in -Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to true -unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd</strong></a> to be your WINS server. Note that you -should <em>*NEVER*</em> set this to true on more than one machine in your -network. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> wins support = no</code> -<p><a name="workgroup"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>workgroup (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when -queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain -name used with the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#securityequaldomain"><strong>"security=domain"</strong></a> -setting. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> set at compile time to WORKGROUP</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> - workgroup = MYGROUP -<p><a name="writable"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>writable (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>"writeable"</strong></a> for people who can't spell :-). -<p><a name="writelist"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>write list (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a -service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be -given write access, no matter what the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>"writeable"</strong></a> -option is set to. The list can include group names using the @group -syntax. -<p>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then -they will be given write access. -<p>See also the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readlist"><strong>"read list"</strong></a> option. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> write list = <empty string></code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> write list = admin, root, @staff</code> -<p><a name="writecachesize"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>write cache size (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This integer parameter (new with Samba 2.0.7) if set to non-zero causes Samba to create an in-memory -cache for each oplocked file (it does <strong>not</strong> do this for non-oplocked files). All -writes that the client does not request to be flushed directly to disk will be -stored in this cache if possible. The cache is flushed onto disk when a write -comes in whose offset would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed -by the client. Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data -is stored within it. -<p>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more efficient write -size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to be the RAID stripe size) and -can improve performance on systems where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck -but there is free memory for userspace programs. -<p>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache (per oplocked file) -in bytes. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> write cache size = 0</code> -<p><strong>Example:</strong> -<code> write cache size = 262144</code> -for a 256k cache size per file. -<p><a name="writeok"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>write ok (S)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>Synonym for <a href="smb.conf.5.html#writeable"><strong>writeable</strong></a>. -<p><a name="writeraw"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>write raw (G)</strong></strong><dd> -<p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw -writes SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never -need to change this parameter. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> write raw = yes</code> -<p><a name="writeable"></a> -<p></p><dt><strong><strong>writeable</strong></strong><dd> -<p>An inverted synonym is <a href="smb.conf.5.html#readonly"><strong>"read only"</strong></a>. -<p>If this parameter is <code>"no"</code>, then users of a service may not create -or modify files in the service's directory. -<p>Note that a printable service <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printable"><strong>("printable = yes")</strong></a> -will <em>*ALWAYS*</em> allow writing to the directory (user privileges -permitting), but only via spooling operations. -<p><strong>Default:</strong> -<code> writeable = no</code> -<p><strong>Examples:</strong> -<pre> - - read only = no - writeable = yes - write ok = yes - -</pre> + [pub] + path = /%S + </TT +></PRE +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEUSERSCRIPT" +></A +>delete user script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +> by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> under special circumstances + decribed below.</P +><P +>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are + created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites + that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database + creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the + Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbd</B +> to delete the required UNIX users <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ON + DEMAND</I +> when a user accesses the Samba server and the + Windows NT user no longer exists.</P +><P +>In order to use this option, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> must be + set to <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=domain</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete + user script</I +></TT +> must be set to a full pathname for a script + that will delete a UNIX user given one argument of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u + </I +></TT +>, which expands into the UNIX user name to delete. + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE</I +> that this is different to the <A +HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +></A +> + which will work with the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=server</I +></TT +> option + as well as <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=domain</I +></TT +>. The reason for this + is only when Samba is a domain member does it get the information + on an attempted user logon that a user no longer exists. In the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=server</I +></TT +> mode a missing user + is treated the same as an invalid password logon attempt. Deleting + the user in this circumstance would not be a good idea.</P +><P +>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, + at <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>login</I +> (session setup in the SMB protocol) + time, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> contacts the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +> and attempts to authenticate + the given user with the given password. If the authentication fails + with the specific Domain error code meaning that the user no longer + exists then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> attempts to find a UNIX user in + the UNIX password database that matches the Windows user account. If + this lookup succeeds, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user script</I +></TT +> is + set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will all the specified script + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +>, expanding any <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> + argument to be the user name to delete.</P +><P +>This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way, + UNIX users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT + accounts.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +>security=domain</A +>, + <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete user script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user + %u</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEREADONLY" +></A +>delete readonly (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. + This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</P +><P +>This option may be useful for running applications such + as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file + permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete readonly = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEVETOFILES" +></A +>delete veto files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option is used when Samba is attempting to + delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories + (see the <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +></A +> + option). If this option is set to False (the default) then if a vetoed + directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the + directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</P +><P +>If this option is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>True</TT +>, then Samba + will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within + the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file + serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within + directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing + (e.g. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.AppleDouble</TT +>)</P +><P +>Setting <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete veto files = yes</B +> allows these + directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory + is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto + files</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete veto files = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DENYHOSTS" +></A +>deny hosts (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts + deny</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DFREECOMMAND" +></A +>dfree command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>dfree command</I +></TT +> setting should + only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal + disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, + but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was + seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each + directory listing.</P +><P +>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to + calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external + routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill + this function.</P +><P +>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating + a directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist + of the string <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>./</TT +>. The script should return two + integers in ascii. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, + and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional + third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default + blocksize is 1024 bytes.</P +><P +>Note: Your script should <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> be setuid or + setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>By default internal routines for + determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used. + </I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree + </B +></P +><P +>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> + #!/bin/sh + df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' + </PRE +></P +><P +>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> + #!/bin/sh + /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' + </PRE +></P +><P +>Note that you may have to replace the command names + with full path names on some systems.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORY" +></A +>directory (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PATH" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYMASK" +></A +>directory mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is the octal modes which are + used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX + directories.</P +><P +>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are + calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, + and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this + parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for + the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> set + here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is + created.</P +><P +>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' + and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the + user who owns the directory to modify it.</P +><P +>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode + created from this parameter with the value of the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by + default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</P +><P +>See the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter to cause particular mode + bits to always be set on created directories.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#CREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter for masking mode bits on created files, + and the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Also refer to the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory mask = 0755</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory mask = 0775</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYMODE" +></A +>directory mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +></A +>directory security mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits + can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX + permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog + box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to + the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in + this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed + to change.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same + value as the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. To allow a user to + modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory, set + this parameter to 0777.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set + it to 0777.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory security mask = <same as + directory mask></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>directory security mask = 0777</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DNSPROXY" +></A +>dns proxy (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Specifies that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not + been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS + name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of + the name-querying client.</P +><P +>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 + characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be + 15 characters, maximum.</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> spawns a second copy of itself to do the + DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking + action.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins support</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dns proxy = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINADMINGROUP" +></A +>domain admin group (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is an <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> parameter + that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may + be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds + that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality + please subscribe to the mailing list <A +HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba-ntdom</A +> available by + visiting the web page at <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://lists.samba.org/</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINADMINUSERS" +></A +>domain admin users (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is an <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> parameter + that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may + be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds + that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality + please subscribe to the mailing list <A +HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba-ntdom</A +> available by + visiting the web page at <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://lists.samba.org/</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINGROUPS" +></A +>domain groups (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is an <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> parameter + that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may + be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds + that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality + please subscribe to the mailing list <A +HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba-ntdom</A +> available by + visiting the web page at <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://lists.samba.org/</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINGUESTGROUP" +></A +>domain guest group (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is an <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> parameter + that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may + be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds + that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality + please subscribe to the mailing list <A +HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba-ntdom</A +> available by + visiting the web page at <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://lists.samba.org/</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINGUESTUSERS" +></A +>domain guest users (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is an <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> parameter + that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may + be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds + that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality + please subscribe to the mailing list <A +HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>samba-ntdom</A +> available by + visiting the web page at <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://lists.samba.org/</A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINLOGONS" +></A +>domain logons (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If set to true, the Samba server will serve + Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +> it is in. Samba 2.2 also + has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows + NT 4 Domains. For more details on setting up this feature see + the file DOMAINS.txt in the Samba documentation directory <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/ + </TT +> shipped with the source code.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain logons = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOMAINMASTER" +></A +>domain master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Tell <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd(8)</B +></A +> to enable WAN-wide browse list + collation. Setting this option causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to + claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies + it as a domain master browser for its given <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +>. Local master browsers + in the same <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> on broadcast-isolated + subnets will give this <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> their local browse lists, + and then ask <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area + network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, + and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list + for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</P +><P +>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be + able to claim this <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> specific special + NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for + that <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> by default (i.e. there is no + way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This + means that if this parameter is set and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> claims + the special name for a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +> before a Windows + NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave + strangely and may fail.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain master = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DONTDESCEND" +></A +>dont descend (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>There are certain directories on some systems + (e.g., the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/proc</TT +> tree under Linux) that are either not + of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This + parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories + that the server should always show as empty.</P +><P +>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format + of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> ./proc</TT +> instead of just <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/proc</TT +>. + Experimentation is the best policy :-) </P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (i.e., all directories are OK + to descend)</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dont descend = /proc,/dev</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION" +></A +>dos filetime resolution (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest + granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter + for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the + nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second + resolution is made to <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual + C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a + share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a + file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a + one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As + the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a + timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not + match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting + this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is + happy.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dos filetime resolution = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DOSFILETIMES" +></A +>dos filetimes (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a + file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, + only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By + default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the + timestamp on a file if the user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> is acting + on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> True</TT +> allows DOS semantics and smbd will change the file + timestamp as DOS requires.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dos filetimes = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +></A +>encrypt passwords (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords + will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and + above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords + unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in + Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation + directory <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> shipped with the source code.</P +><P +>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> must either + have access to a local <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd(5) + </TT +></A +> file (see the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> program for information on how to set up + and maintain this file), or set the <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +>security=[serve|domain]</A +> parameter which + causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> to authenticate against another + server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>encrypt passwords = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="EXEC" +></A +>exec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a synonym for <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES" +></A +>fake directory create times (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create + time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the + ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default + reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting + this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight + 1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.</P +><P +>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for + Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated + makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object + file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE + compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a + directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not + exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier + timestamp than the object files it contains.</P +><P +>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time + reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or + deleted in the directory. NMAKE therefore finds all object files + in the object directory bar the last one built are out of date + compared to the directory and rebuilds them. Enabling this option + ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build + will proceed as expected.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake directory create times = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FAKEOPLOCKS" +></A +>fake oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission + from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants + an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume + that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively + cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache + file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits. + </P +><P +>When you set <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake oplocks = yes</B +>, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> will + always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using + the file.</P +><P +>It is generally much better to use the real <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> support rather + than this parameter.</P +><P +>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or + shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a + time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see + a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable + this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the + files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use + this option carefully!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fake oplocks = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FOLLOWSYMLINKS" +></A +>follow symlinks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows the Samba administrator + to stop <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> + from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this + parameter to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> prevents any file or directory + that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an + error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a + symbolic link to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> in their home + directory for instance. However it will slow filename lookups + down slightly.</P +><P +>This option is enabled (i.e. <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will + follow symbolic links) by default.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>follow symlinks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCECREATEMODE" +></A +>force create mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit + permissions that will <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>always</I +> be set on a + file by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto + the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its + permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal) + 000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file + mode after the mask set in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + parameter is applied.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create + mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details on masking mode bits on files.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>inherit + permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force create mode = 000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force create mode = 0755</B +></P +><P +>would force all created files to have read and execute + permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the + read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +></A +>force directory mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit + permissions that will <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>always</I +> be set on a directory + created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the + mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this + parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission + bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode + mask in the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +> is + applied.</P +><P +>See also the parameter <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details on masking mode bits + on created directories.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> inherit permissions</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory mode = 000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory mode = 0755</B +></P +><P +>would force all created directories to have read and execute + permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the + read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +></A +>force directory security mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits + can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX + permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the + changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that + the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security + on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same + value as the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. To allow + a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a + directory, with restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set + it to 0000.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory security mode = <same as + force directory mode></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force directory security mode = 0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEGROUP" +></A +>force group (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be + assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting + to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring + that all access to files on service will use the named group for + their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this + group to the files and directories within this service the Samba + administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended + functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here + has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing + the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group + if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows + an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a + particular group will create files with group ownership set to that + group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For + example, the setting <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>force group = +sys</TT +> means + that only users who are already in group sys will have their default + primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All + other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</P +><P +>If the <A +HREF="#FORCEUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter is also set the group specified in + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group</I +></TT +> will override the primary group + set in <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force user</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#FORCEUSER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + user</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no forced group</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force group = agroup</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCESECURITYMODE" +></A +>force security mode (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission + bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating + the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog + box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the + changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that + the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security + on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same + value as the <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + create mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. To allow a user to + modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no + restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that users who can access + the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, + so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set + it to 0000.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security + mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force security mode = <same as force + create mode></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force security mode = 0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FORCEUSER" +></A +>force user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be + assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. + This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully + as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</P +><P +>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. + Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a + valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed + as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected + as.</P +><P +>This can be very useful.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the + primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group + for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left + as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#FORCEGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force group + </I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no forced user</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>force user = auser</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="FSTYPE" +></A +>fstype (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows the administrator to + configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share + is using that is reported by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8) + </B +></A +> when a client queries the filesystem type + for a share. The default type is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>NTFS</TT +> for + compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other + strings such as <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Samba</TT +> or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>FAT + </TT +> if required.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fstype = NTFS</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fstype = Samba</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GETWDCACHE" +></A +>getwd cache (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a + caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() + calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially + when the <A +HREF="#WIDELINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +> + </A +>parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>False</TT +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>getwd cache = No</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GROUP" +></A +>group (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#FORCEGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + group</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTACCOUNT" +></A +>guest account (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a username which will be used for access + to services which are specified as <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest ok</I +></TT +></A +> (see below). Whatever privileges this + ser has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. + Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not + have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice + for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service, + the specified username overrides this one.</P +><P +>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not + be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test + this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>su -</B +> command) and trying to print using the + system print command such as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpr(1)</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> lp(1)</B +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>specified at compile time, usually + "nobody"</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest account = ftp</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTOK" +></A +>guest ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for + a service, then no password is equired to connect to the service. + Privileges will be those of the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest account</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>See the section below on <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +> for more information about this option. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest ok = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="GUESTONLY" +></A +>guest only (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for + a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. + This parameter will have no affect if <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest ok</I +></TT +></A +> is not set for the service.</P +><P +>See the section below on <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +> for more information about this option. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>guest only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDEDOTFILES" +></A +>hide dot files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether + files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide dot files = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDEFILES" +></A +>hide files(S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of files or directories that are not + visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied + to any files or directories that match.</P +><P +>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', + which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' + and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories + as in DOS wildcards.</P +><P +>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must + not include the Unix directory separator '/'.</P +><P +>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable + in hiding files.</P +><P +>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, + as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match + as they are scanned.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#HIDEDOTFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide + dot files</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> veto files</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no file are hidden</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide files = + /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</B +></P +><P +>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh + SMB client (DAVE) available from <A +HREF="http://www.thursby.com" +TARGET="_top" +> + Thursby</A +> creates for internal use, and also still hides + all files beginning with a dot.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HIDELOCALUSERS" +></A +>hide local users(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX + users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hide local users = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOMEDIRMAP" +></A +>homedir map (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If<A +HREF="#NISHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir + </I +></TT +></A +> is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>True</TT +>, and <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +> is also acting + as a Win95/98 <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon server</I +></TT +> then this parameter + specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's + home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun + auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username server:/some/file/system</B +></P +><P +>and the program will extract the servername from before + the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system + that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another + automounter) maps.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE :</I +>A working NIS client is required on + the system for this option to work.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NISHOMEDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nis homedir</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain logons</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>homedir map = auto.home</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>homedir map = amd.homedir</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSALLOW" +></A +>hosts allow (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for this parameter is <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow + hosts</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited + set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section then it will + apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual + service has a different setting.</P +><P +>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For + example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a + Class C subnet with something like <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow hosts = 150.203.5. + </B +>. The full syntax of the list is described in the man + page <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>hosts_access(5)</TT +>. Note that this man + page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will + be given here also.</P +><P +>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always + be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +></A +> option.</P +><P +>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and + by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXCEPT</I +> keyword can also be used to limit a + wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</P +><P +>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</B +></P +><P +>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</B +></P +><P +>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</B +></P +><P +>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but + deny access from one particular host</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts allow = @foonet</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts deny = pirate</B +></P +><P +>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</P +><P +>See <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm(1)</B +> + </A +> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does + what you expect.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (i.e., all hosts permitted access) + </I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSDENY" +></A +>hosts deny (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>The opposite of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +> + - hosts listed here are <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> permitted access to + services unless the specific services have their own lists to override + this one. Where the lists conflict, the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>allow</I +></TT +> + list takes precedence.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded) + </I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="HOSTSEQUIV" +></A +>hosts equiv (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this global parameter is a non-null string, + it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts + and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password. + </P +><P +>This is not be confused with <A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +> which is about hosts + access to services and is more useful for guest services. <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> hosts equiv</I +></TT +> may be useful for NT clients which will + not supply passwords to samba.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE :</I +> The use of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv + </I +></TT +> can be a major security hole. This is because you are + trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to + get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts equiv</I +></TT +> option be only used if you really + know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust + your spouse and kids. And only if you <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>really</I +> trust + them :-).</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no host equivalences</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INCLUDE" +></A +>include (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This allows you to include one config file + inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed + in place.</P +><P +>It takes the standard substitutions, except <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u + </I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%P</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no file included</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>include = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INHERITPERMISSIONS" +></A +>inherit permissions (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>The permissions on new files and directories + are normally governed by <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> create mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> but the boolean inherit + permissions parameter overrides this.</P +><P +>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, + including bits such as setgid.</P +><P +>New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent + directory. Their execute bits continue to be determined by + <A +HREF="#MAPARCHIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map archive</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#MAPHIDDEN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map hidden</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#MAPSYSTEM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map system</I +></TT +> + </A +> as usual.</P +><P +>Note that the setuid bit is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>never</I +> set via + inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</P +><P +>This can be particularly useful on large systems with + many users, perhaps several thousand,to allow a single [homes] + share to be used flexibly by each user.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask + </I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>inherit permissions = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INTERFACES" +></A +>interfaces (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to override the default + network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name + registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query + the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any + interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</P +><P +>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string + can be in any of the following forms:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>a network interface name (such as eth0). + This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match + any interface starting with the substring "eth"</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>an IP address. In this case the netmask is + determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the + kernel</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>an IP/mask pair. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>a broadcast/mask pair.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such + as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted + decmal form.</P +><P +>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted + decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via + the OSes normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</P +><P +>For example, the following line:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0 + </B +></P +><P +>would configure three network interfaces corresponding + to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. + The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#BINDINTERFACESONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>bind + interfaces only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="INVALIDUSERS" +></A +>invalid users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that should not be allowed + to login to this service. This is really a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>paranoid</I +> + check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach + your security.</P +><P +>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS + netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX + group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.</P +><P +>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only + by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with + '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database + (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters + '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order + so the value <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>+&group</I +></TT +> means check the + UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and + the value <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>&+group"</I +></TT +> means check the NIS + netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the + same as the '@' prefix).</P +><P +>The current servicename is substituted for <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S</I +></TT +>. + This is useful in the [homes] section.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#VALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no invalid users</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>invalid users = root fred admin @wheel + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="KEEPALIVE" +></A +>keepalive (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents + the number of seconds between <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>keepalive</I +></TT +> + packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be + sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether + a client is still present and responding.</P +><P +>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket + being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <A +HREF="#SOCKETOPTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>socket options</I +></TT +></A +>). + Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>keepalive = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>keepalive = 60</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="KERNELOPLOCKS" +></A +>kernel oplocks (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>For UNIXs that support kernel based <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> + (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter + allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</P +><P +>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks + </I +></TT +> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation + accesses a file that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +> + </A +> has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between + SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>very</I +> + cool feature :-).</P +><P +>This parameter defaults to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>on</TT +> on systems + that have the support, and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>off</TT +> on systems that + don't. You should never need to touch this parameter.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>level2 oplocks + </I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>kernel oplocks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +></A +>level2 oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether Samba supports + level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</P +><P +>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients + that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock + to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead + of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, + exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that + support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie. + they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance + for many acesses of files that are not commonly written (such as + application .EXE files).</P +><P +>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock + writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed + or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and + delete any read-ahead caches.</P +><P +>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on + to speed access to shared executables (and also to test + the code :-).</P +><P +>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</P +><P +>Currently, if <A +HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel + oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> are supported then level2 oplocks are + not granted (even if this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>). + Note also, the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter must be set to "true" on this share in order for + this parameter to have any effect.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>level2 oplocks = False</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LMANNOUNCE" +></A +>lm announce (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd(8)</B +></A +> will produce Lanman announce + broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see + the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three + values, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +>, or + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +>. The default is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +>. + If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> Samba will never produce these + broadcasts. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> Samba will produce + Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +>. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>auto</TT +> + Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will + listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will + then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#LMINTERVAL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm interval + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm announce = auto</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm announce = true</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LMINTERVAL" +></A +>lm interval (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce + broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <A +HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +></A +> parameter) then this + parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be + made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be + made despite the setting of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm announce</I +></TT +> + parameter.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lm + announce</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm interval = 60</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lm interval = 120</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOADPRINTERS" +></A +>load printers (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>A boolean variable that controls whether all + printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. + See the <A +HREF="#AEN78" +>printers</A +> section for + more details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>load printers = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCALMASTER" +></A +>local master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd(8)</B +></A +> to try and become a local master browser + on a subnet. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>False</TT +> then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd</B +> will not attempt to become a local master browser + on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By + default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't + mean that Samba will <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>become</I +> the local master + browser on a subnet, just that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> participate</I +> in elections for local master browser.</P +><P +>Setting this value to False will cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>never</I +> to become a local master browser.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>local master = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKDIR" +></A +>lock dir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> lock directory</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKDIRECTORY" +></A +>lock directory (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies the directory where lock + files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the + <A +HREF="#MAXCONNECTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections</I +></TT +> + </A +> option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lock directory = /tmp/samba</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lock directory = /usr/local/samba/var/locks</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOCKING" +></A +>locking (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether or not locking will be + performed by the server in response to lock requests from the + client.</P +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = no</B +>, all lock and unlock requests + will appear to succeed and all lock queries will indicate that the + queried lock is clear.</P +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = yes</B +>, real locking will be performed + by the server.</P +><P +>This option <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>may</I +> be useful for read-only + filesystems which <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>may</I +> not need locking (such as + cdrom drives), although setting this parameter of <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> + is not really recommended even in this case.</P +><P +>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a + specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. + You should never need to set this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>locking = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGFILE" +></A +>log file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This options allows you to override the name + of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate log files for each user or machine.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGLEVEL" +></A +>log level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug level</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONDRIVE" +></A +>logon drive (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the local path to + which the home directory will be connected (see <A +HREF="#LOGONHOME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +></A +>) + and is only used by NT Workstations. </P +><P +>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a + logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon drive = z:</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon drive = h:</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONHOME" +></A +>logon home (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the home directory + location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. + It allows you to do </P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\> </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>NET USE H: /HOME</B +></TT +> + </P +><P +>from a command prompt, for example.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure + that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's + home directory. This is done in the following way:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\profile</B +></P +><P +>This tells Samba to return the above string, with + substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally + in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to + \\server\share when a user does <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use /home"</B +> + but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.</P +><P +>Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <A +HREF="#LOGONPATH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon path</I +></TT +></A +> was returned rather than + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +>. This broke <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use + /home</B +> but allowed profiles outside the home directory. + The current implementation is correct, and can be used for + profiles if you use the above trick.</P +><P +>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon + server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = "\\%N\%U"</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONPATH" +></A +>logon path (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the home directory + where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are + stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has + nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to + handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the <A +HREF="#LOGONHOME" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>logon home</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you + to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also + specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", + (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>desktop</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>start menu</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>network neighborhood</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>programs</TT +> + and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on + your Windows NT client.</P +><P +>The share and the path must be readable by the user for + the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT + client. The share must be writeable when the logs in for the first + time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat + and other directories.</P +><P +>Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, + if required, be made read-only. It is not advisable that the + NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to + achieve the desired effect (a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MAN</I +>datory + profile). </P +><P +>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to + the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in. + Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a + reference to the homes share (i.e. setting this parameter to + \%N\%U\profile_path will cause problems).</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing + you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up + as a logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LOGONSCRIPT" +></A +>logon script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or + NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when + a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS + style cr/lf line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the + file is recommended.</P +><P +>The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] + service. If the [netlogon] service specifies a <A +HREF="#PATH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>path</I +></TT +></A +> of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/netlogon + </TT +>, and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon script = STARTUP.BAT</B +>, then + the file that will be downloaded is:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</TT +></P +><P +>The contents of the batch file is entirely your choice. A + suggested command would be to add <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET + /YES</B +>, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with + the same time server. Another use would be to add <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>NET USE + U: \\SERVER\UTILS</B +> for commonly used utilities, or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</B +> for example.</P +><P +>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write + access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission + on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow + the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be + breached.</P +><P +>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you + to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P +><P +>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon + server.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no logon script defined</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>logon script = scripts\%U.bat</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPPAUSECOMMAND" +></A +>lppause command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling + a specific print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way + of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs + having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing=hpux + </I +></TT +>), if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-p%p</I +></TT +> option is added + to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. + if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will + have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it + will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: Currently no default value is given to + this string, unless the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> + parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, in which case the default is :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lp -i %p-%j -H hold</B +></P +><P +>or if the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> parameter + is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, then the default is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>qstat -s -j%j -h</B +></P +><P +>Example for HPUX: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt + %p-%j -p0</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPQCACHETIME" +></A +>lpq cache time (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls how long lpq info will be cached + for to prevent the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command being called too + often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> lpq</B +> command used by the system, so if you use different + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> commands for different users then they won't + share cache information.</P +><P +>The cache files are stored in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</TT +> + where xxxx is a hash of the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command in use.</P +><P +>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results + of a previous identical <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command will be used + if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old. A large value may + be advisable if your <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq</B +> command is very slow.</P +><P +>A value of 0 will disable caching completely.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq cache time = 10</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq cache time = 30</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPQCOMMAND" +></A +>lpq command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to obtain <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq + </B +>-style printer status information.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which + takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer + status information.</P +><P +>Currently eight styles of printer status information + are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX and SOFTQ. + This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected + using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing =</I +></TT +> option.</P +><P +>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not + correctly send the connection number for the printer they are + requesting status information about. To get around this, the + server reports on the first printer service connected to by the + client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the + command.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +> as the PATH may not be + available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printing</I +></TT +></I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq %p</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPRESUMECOMMAND" +></A +>lpresume command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to restart or continue + printing or spooling a specific print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See + also the <A +HREF="#LPPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer).</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path + in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +> as the PATH may not + be available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: Currently no default value is given + to this string, unless the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> + parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, in which case the default is :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lp -i %p-%j -H resume</B +></P +><P +>or if the value of the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +> parameter + is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, then the default is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>qstat -s -j%j -r</B +></P +><P +>Example for HPUX: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt + %p-%j -p2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="LPRMCOMMAND" +></A +>lprm command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%j</I +></TT +> is replaced with + the job number (an integer).</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +> as the PATH may not be + available to the server.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></I +></P +><P +>Example 1: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j + </B +></P +><P +>Example 2: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT" +></A +>machine password timeout (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If a Samba server is a member of an Windows + NT Domain (see the <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +>security=domain</A +>) + parameter) then periodically a running <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT + PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>private/secrets.tdb + </TT +>. This parameter specifies how often this password + will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in + seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8) + </B +></A +>, and the <A +HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +> security=domain</A +>) parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>machine password timeout = 604800</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAGICOUTPUT" +></A +>magic output (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a file + which will contain output created by a magic script (see the + <A +HREF="#MAGICSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter below).</P +><P +>Warning: If two clients use the same <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>magic script + </I +></TT +> in the same directory the output file content + is undefined.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic output = <magic script name>.out + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic output = myfile.txt</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAGICSCRIPT" +></A +>magic script (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, + if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. + This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and + executed on behalf of the connected user.</P +><P +>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon + completion, permissions permitting.</P +><P +>If the script generates output, output will be sent to + the file specified by the <A +HREF="#MAGICOUTPUT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> magic output</I +></TT +></A +> parameter (see above).</P +><P +>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts + containing carriage-return-linefeed instead of linefeed as + the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>as is</I +> on the host, which for some hosts and + some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</P +><P +>Magic scripts are <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>EXPERIMENTAL</I +> and + should <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> be relied upon.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>None. Magic scripts disabled.</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>magic script = user.csh</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLECASE" +></A +>mangle case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN201" +> NAME MANGLING</A +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDMAP" +></A +>mangled map (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX + file names which can not be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling + of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have + documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. + For example, under UNIX it is common to use <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.html</TT +> + for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.htm</TT +> + is more commonly used.</P +><P +>So to map <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>html</TT +> to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>htm</TT +> + you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</B +></P +><P +>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>;1 + </TT +> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible + under some UNIXs). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no mangled map</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled map = (*;1 *;)</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDNAMES" +></A +>mangled names (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX + should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, + or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN201" +> NAME MANGLING</A +> for details on how to control the mangling process.</P +><P +>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters + before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced + to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters + of the mangled name.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled + name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the + original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final + extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation + only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three + characters.</P +><P +>Note that the character to use may be specified using + the <A +HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>mangling char</I +></TT +> + </A +> option, if you don't like '~'.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The first three alphanumeric characters of the final + extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the + extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that + part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no + dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except + in the case of "hidden files" - see below).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be + presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as + for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as + its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three + underscores).</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case + alphanumeric characters.</P +><P +>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files + in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters. + The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.</P +><P +>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be + copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining + the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension + from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names + do not change between sessions.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled names = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLINGCHAR" +></A +>mangling char (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what character is used as + the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>magic</I +> character in <A +HREF="#AEN201" +>name mangling</A +>. The default is a '~' + but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set + it to whatever you prefer.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangling char = ~</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangling char = ^</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MANGLEDSTACK" +></A +>mangled stack (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls the number of mangled names + that should be cached in the Samba server <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +>.</P +><P +>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names + (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters + or contains upper case characters).</P +><P +>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled + names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. + However, large stack sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller + stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes). + </P +><P +>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long + file names, so be prepared for some surprises!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled stack = 50</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mangled stack = 100</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPARCHIVE" +></A +>map archive (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute + should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit + is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One + motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making + any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can + be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out + (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map archive = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPHIDDEN" +></A +>map hidden (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether DOS style hidden files + should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. + it must include 001). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map hidden = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPSYSTEM" +></A +>map system (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls whether DOS style system files + should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.</P +><P +>Note that this requires the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +> + to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. + it must include 010). See the parameter <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +> for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map system = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAPTOGUEST" +></A +>map to guest (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only useful in <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +> security</A +> modes other than <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=share</I +></TT +> + - i.e. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>user</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>server</TT +>, + and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>domain</TT +>.</P +><P +>This parameter can take three different values, which tell + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> what to do with user + login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</P +><P +>The three settings are :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Never</TT +> - Means user login + requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the + default.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Bad User</TT +> - Means user + logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username + does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and + mapped into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest account</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>Bad Password</TT +> - Means user logins + with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped + into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +>guest account</A +>. Note that + this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing + their password will be silently logged on as a "guest" - and + will not know the reason they cannot access files they think + they should - there will have been no message given to them + that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>hate</I +> you if you set the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to + guest</I +></TT +> parameter this way :-).</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" + share services when using <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> modes other than + share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being + requested is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server + cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection + to the share) for "Guest" shares.</P +><P +>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this + parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> GUEST_SESSSETUP</TT +> value in local.h.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map to guest = Never</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>map to guest = Bad User</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXCONNECTIONS" +></A +>max connections (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows the number of simultaneous + connections to a service to be limited. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max connections + </I +></TT +> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if + this number of connections to the service are already open. A value + of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</P +><P +>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The + lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the <A +HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lock directory</I +></TT +></A +> + option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max connections = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max connections = 10</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXDISKSIZE" +></A +>max disk size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to put an upper limit + on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 + then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in + size.</P +><P +>Note that this option does not limit the amount of + data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still + store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks + for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the + result will be bounded by the amount specified in <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max + disk size</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs + in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, + particularly disks over 1GB in size.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>max disk size</I +></TT +> of 0 means no limit.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max disk size = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max disk size = 1000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXLOGSIZE" +></A +>max log size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies + the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks + the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding + a <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.old</TT +> extension.</P +><P +>A size of 0 means no limit.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max log size = 5000</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max log size = 1000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXMUX" +></A +>max mux (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option controls the maximum number of + outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that samba tells the client + it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max mux = 50</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXOPENFILES" +></A +>max open files (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter limits the maximum number of + open files that one <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> file + serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The + default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses + only one bit per unopened file.</P +><P +>The limit of the number of open files is usually set + by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than + this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max open files = 10000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXTTL" +></A +>max ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) + when <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> is requesting a name using either a + broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to + change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max ttl = 259200</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXWINSTTL" +></A +>max wins ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8) + </A +> when acting as a WINS server (<A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wins support=yes</I +></TT +></A +>) what the maximum + 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this + parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#MINWINSTTL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min + wins ttl"</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max wins ttl = 518400</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MAXXMIT" +></A +>max xmit (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option controls the maximum packet size + that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which + is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance + with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max xmit = 65535</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>max xmit = 8192</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MESSAGECOMMAND" +></A +>message command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies what command to run when the + server receives a WinPopup style message.</P +><P +>This would normally be a command that would + deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is + up to your imagination.</P +><P +>An example is:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</B +> + </P +><P +>This delivers the message using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>xedit</B +>, then + removes it afterwards. <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT + THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</I +>. That's why I + have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then + your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover + after 30secs, hopefully).</P +><P +>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. + The command takes the standard substitutions, although <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> %u</I +></TT +> won't work (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%U</I +></TT +> may be better + in this case).</P +><P +>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional + ones apply. In particular:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s</I +></TT +> = the filename containing + the message.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%t</I +></TT +> = the destination that + the message was sent to (probably the server name).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f</I +></TT +> = who the message + is from.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else + takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting + ideas you have.</P +><P +>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on + %m' root < %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>If you don't have a message command then the message + won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was + an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code + and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered. + </P +><P +>If you want to silently delete it then try:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = rm %s</B +></P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no message command</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s; + rm %s' &</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPRINTSPACE" +></A +>min print space (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the minimum amount of free disk + space that must be available before a user will be able to spool + a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which + means a user can always spool a print job.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min print space = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min print space = 2000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPASSWDLENGTH" +></A +>min passwd length (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#MINPASSWORDLENGTH" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>min password length</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINPASSWORDLENGTH" +></A +>min password length (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option sets the minimum length in characters + of a plaintext password than smbd will accept when performing + UNIX password changing.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min password length = 5</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="MINWINSTTL" +></A +>min wins ttl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option tells <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + when acting as a WINS server (<A +HREF="#WINSSUPPORT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins support = yes</I +></TT +></A +>) what the minimum 'time to live' + of NetBIOS names that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will grant will be (in + seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default + is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>min wins ttl = 21600</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NAMERESOLVEORDER" +></A +>name resolve order (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option is used by the programs in the Samba + suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve + host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space separated + string of different name resolution options.</P +><P +>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They + cause names to be resolved as follows :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>lmhosts</TT +> : Lookup an IP + address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has + no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <A +HREF="lmhosts.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>lmhosts(5)</A +> for details) then + any name type matches for lookup.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>host</TT +> : Do a standard host + name to IP address resolution, using the system <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts + </TT +>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution + is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this + may be controlled by the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +> + file). Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name + type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise + it is ignored.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>wins</TT +> : Query a name with + the IP address listed in the <A +HREF="#WINSSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> wins server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. If no WINS server has + been specified this method will be ignored.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>bcast</TT +> : Do a broadcast on + each of the known local interfaces listed in the <A +HREF="#INTERFACES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>interfaces</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution + methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally + connected subnet.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host + </B +></P +><P +>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined + first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal + system hostname lookup.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSALIASES" +></A +>netbios aliases (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> will advertise as additional + names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine + to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is + acting as a browse server or logon server none + of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon + servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised + with these capabilities.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NETBIOSNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios + name</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>empty string (no additional names)</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSNAME" +></A +>netbios name (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba + server is known. By default it is the same as the first component + of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or + logon server this name (or the first component + of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are + advertised under.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>netbios + aliases</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>machine DNS name</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>netbios name = MYNAME</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NETBIOSSCOPE" +></A +>netbios scope (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will + operate under. This should not be set unless every machine + on your LAN also sets this value.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NISHOMEDIR" +></A +>nis homedir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For + UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory + will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote + server. </P +><P +>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory + server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two + network hops would be required to access the users home directory + if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server + for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can + be very slow.</P +><P +>This option allows Samba to return the home share as + being on a different server to the logon server and as + long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, + it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory + server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it + will consult the NIS map specified in <A +HREF="#HOMEDIRMAP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>homedir map</I +></TT +></A +> and return the server + listed there.</P +><P +>Note that for this option to work there must be a working + NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also + be a logon server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nis homedir = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NTACLSUPPORT" +></A +>nt acl support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will attempt to map + UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nt acl support = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NTPIPESUPPORT" +></A +>nt pipe support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will allow Windows NT + clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>IPC$</TT +> + pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left + alone.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nt pipe support = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NTSMBSUPPORT" +></A +>nt smb support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will negotiate NT specific SMB + support with Windows NT clients. Although this is a developer + debugging option and should be left alone, benchmarking has discovered + that Windows NT clients give faster performance with this option + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>. This is still being investigated. + If this option is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> then Samba offers + exactly the same SMB calls that versions prior to Samba 2.0 offered. + This information may be of use if any users are having problems + with NT SMB support.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nt support = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="NULLPASSWORDS" +></A +>null passwords (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Allow or disallow client access to accounts + that have null passwords. </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd (5)</A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>null passwords = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OLELOCKINGCOMPATIBILITY" +></A +>ole locking compatibility (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter allows an administrator to turn + off the byte range lock manipulation that is done within Samba to + give compatibility for OLE applications. Windows OLE applications + use byte range locking as a form of inter-process communication, by + locking ranges of bytes around the 2^32 region of a file range. This + can cause certain UNIX lock managers to crash or otherwise cause + problems. Setting this parameter to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> means you + trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases correctly.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ole locking compatibility = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ONLYGUEST" +></A +>only guest (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>A synonym for <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> guest only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ONLYUSER" +></A +>only user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean option that controls whether + connections with usernames not in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> + list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so a client + can supply a username to be used by the server.</P +><P +>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce + usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for + the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>user = + %S</B +> which means your <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> list + will be just the service name, which for home directories is the + name of the user.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#USER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>only user = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKS" +></A +>oplocks (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean option tells smbd whether to + issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this + share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve + the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients + to aggressively cache files ocally and you may want to disable this + option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by + default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>Speed.txt</TT +> in the Samba <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> + directory.</P +><P +>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files on + a per share basis. See the <A +HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> veto oplock files</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. On some systems + oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This + allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, + whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel oplocks</I +></TT +> parameter for details.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>kernel + oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> level2 oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplocks = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME" +></A +>oplock break wait time (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in + both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too + quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock + break request, then the client redirector can fail and not respond + to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) + is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break + request to such (broken) clients.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</I +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplock break wait time = 10</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT" +></A +>oplock contention limit (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>very</I +> advanced + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> tuning option to + improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple + client contention for the same file.</P +><P +>In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbd not to + grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of + clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this + limit. This causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> to behave in a similar + way to Windows NT.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</I +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>oplock contention limit = 2</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="OSLEVEL" +></A +>os level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This integer value controls what level Samba + advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this + parameter determines whether <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> WORKGROUP</I +></TT +> in the local broadcast area. The default is + zero, which means <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> will lose elections to + Windows machines. See <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt</TT +> in the + Samba <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>os level = 20</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>os level = 65 </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PANICACTION" +></A +>panic action (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a Samba developer option that allows a + system command to be called when either <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> or <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> + crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that + a problem occurred.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>panic action = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDCHAT" +></A +>passwd chat (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This string controls the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>"chat"</I +> + conversation that takes places between <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> and the local password changing + program to change the users password. The string describes a + sequence of response-receive pairs that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd(8)</A +> uses to determine what to send to the + <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> + </A +> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not + received then the password is not changed.</P +><P +>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending + on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS + etc).</P +><P +>The string can contain the macros <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%o</I +></TT +> + and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%n</I +></TT +> which are substituted for the old + and new passwords respectively. It can also contain the standard + macros <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>\n</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>\r</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> \t</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>%s</TT +> to give line-feed, + carriage-return, tab and space.</P +><P +>The string can also contain a '*' which matches + any sequence of characters.</P +><P +>Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces + in them into a single string.</P +><P +>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence + is a fullstop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, + is the expect string is a fullstop then no string is expected.</P +><P +>Note that if the <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set to true, then this + sequence is called <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +> when the SMB password + in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old + password cleartext. In this case the old password cleartext is set + to "" (the empty string).</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password + sync</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> passwd program</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat debug</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat = *old*password* %o\n *new* + password* %n\n *new*password* %n\n *changed*</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n + "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password + changed*"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDCHATDEBUG" +></A +>passwd chat debug (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script + parameter is run in <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>debug</I +> mode. In this mode the + strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed + in the <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> log with a + <A +HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>debug level</I +></TT +></A +> + of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords + to be seen in the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> log. It is available to help + Samba admins debug their <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +> scripts + when calling the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> and should + be turned off after this has been done. This parameter is off by + default.</P +><P +>See also <<A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +> + </A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat debug = no</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd chat debug = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWDPROGRAM" +></A +>passwd program (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The name of a program that can be used to set + UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> + will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for + existence before calling the password changing program.</P +><P +>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>reasonable + </I +> passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion + of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients + (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending + it.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that if the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +> parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>True + </TT +> then this program is called <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +> + before the SMB password in the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd(5) + </A +> file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will fail to change the SMB password also + (this is by design).</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix password sync</I +></TT +> parameter + is set this parameter <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</I +> + for <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ALL</I +> programs called, and must be examined + for security implications. Note that by default <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +> is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>False</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>unix + password sync</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd program = /bin/passwd</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd program = /sbin/npasswd %u</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWORDLEVEL" +></A +>password level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Some client/server combinations have difficulty + with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for + Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper + case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when + using COREPLUS!</P +><P +>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters + that may be upper case in passwords.</P +><P +>For example, say the password given was "FRED". If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> password level</I +></TT +> is set to 1, the following combinations + would be tried if "FRED" failed:</P +><P +>"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"</P +><P +>If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password level</I +></TT +> was set to 2, + the following combinations would also be tried: </P +><P +>"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..</P +><P +>And so on.</P +><P +>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely + it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single + case password. However, you should be aware that use of this + parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to + process a new connection.</P +><P +>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be + made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password level = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password level = 4</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PASSWORDSERVER" +></A +>password server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such + as a WinNT box) with this option, and using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain + </B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> you can get Samba + to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.</P +><P +>This options sets the name of the password server to use. + It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is + different from its internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS + name to the lmhosts file which is stored in the same directory + as the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file.</P +><P +>The name of the password server is looked up using the + parameter <A +HREF="#NAMERESOLVEORDER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>name + resolve order</I +></TT +></A +> and so may resolved + by any method and order described in that parameter.</P +><P +>The password server much be a machine capable of using + the "LM1.2X002" or the "LM NT 0.12" protocol, and it must be in + user level security mode.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> Using a password server + means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your + password server. <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT + YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</I +>.</P +><P +>Never point a Samba server at itself for password + serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba + server!</P +><P +>The name of the password server takes the standard + substitutions, but probably the only useful one is <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%m + </I +></TT +>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming + client as the passwordserver. If you use this then you better + trust your clients, and you better restrict them with hosts allow!</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> parameter is set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>domain</TT +>, then the list of machines in this + option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the + Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is cryptographicly + in that domain, and will use cryptographicly authenticated RPC calls + to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security = domain</B +> is that if you list several hosts in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> option then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This + is useful in case your primary server goes down.</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> option is set + to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the + Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by + doing a query for the name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>WORKGROUP<1C></TT +> + and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP + addresses from the name resolution source. </P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security</I +></TT +> parameter is + set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>server</TT +>, then there are different + restrictions that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> doesn't + suffer from:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>You may list several password servers in + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> parameter, however if an + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> makes a connection to a password server, + and then the password server fails, no more users will be able + to be authenticated from this <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +>. This is a + restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security=server + </B +> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If you are using a Windows NT server as your + password server then you will have to ensure that your users + are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security=server</B +> mode the network logon will appear to + come from there rather than from the users workstation.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = <empty string></B +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2 + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = *</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PATH" +></A +>path (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies a directory to which + the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of + printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to + being submitted to the host for printing.</P +><P +>For a printable service offering guest access, the service + should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and + have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but + you probably won't get the results you expect if you do + otherwise.</P +><P +>Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> in the path + will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using + on this connection. Any occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%m</I +></TT +> + will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are + connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting + up pseudo home directories for users.</P +><P +>Note that this path will be based on <A +HREF="#ROOTDIR" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root dir</I +></TT +></A +> if one was specified.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>path = /home/fred</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="POSTEXEC" +></A +>postexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies a command to be run + whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual + substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some + systems.</P +><P +>An interesting example may be do unmount server + resources:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</B +></P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (no command executed)</I +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S + from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="POSTSCRIPT" +></A +>postscript (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter forces a printer to interpret + the print files as postscript. This is done by adding a <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>%! + </TT +> to the start of print output.</P +><P +>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist + in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then + confuses your printer.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>postscript = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREEXEC" +></A +>preexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option specifies a command to be run whenever + the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</P +><P +>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome + message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here + is an example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | + /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </B +></P +><P +>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close + </I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#POSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (no command executed)</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m + (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREEXECCLOSE" +></A +>preexec close (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero + return code from <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec + </I +></TT +></A +> should close the service being connected to.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preexec close = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREFERREDMASTER" +></A +>preferred master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> is a preferred master browser + for its workgroup.</P +><P +>If this is set to true, on startup, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> + will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in + winning the election. It is recommended that this parameter is + used in conjunction with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +><A +HREF="#DOMAINMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> domain master</I +></TT +></A +> = yes</B +>, so that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> nmbd</B +> can guarantee becoming a domain master.</P +><P +>Use this option with caution, because if there are several + hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred + master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically + and continuously attempt to become the local master browser. + This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing + capabilities.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#OSLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>os level</I +></TT +> + </A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preferred master = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PREFEREDMASTER" +></A +>prefered master (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PREFERREDMASTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preferred master</I +></TT +></A +> for people who cannot spell :-).</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRELOAD" +></A +>preload</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#AUTOSERVICES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> auto services</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRESERVECASE" +></A +>preserve case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +> This controls if new filenames are created + with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to + be the <A +HREF="#DEFAULTCASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>derault case + </I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preserve case = yes</B +></P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN201" +>NAME + MANGLING"</A +> for a fuller discussion.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCOMMAND" +></A +>print command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>After a print job has finished spooling to + a service, this command will be used via a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>system()</B +> + call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will + submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there + is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove + the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the + spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to + manually remove old spool files.</P +><P +>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used + verbatim, with two exceptions: All occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s + </I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f</I +></TT +> will be replaced by the + appropriate spool file name, and all occurrences of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p + </I +></TT +> will be replaced by the appropriate printer name. The + spool file name is generated automatically by the server, the printer + name is discussed below.</P +><P +>The print command <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> contain at least + one occurrence of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%s</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%f + </I +></TT +> - the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is optional. At the time + a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p + </I +></TT +> will be silently removed from the printer command.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section, the print command given + will be used for any printable service that does not have its own + print command specified.</P +><P +>If there is neither a specified print command for a + printable service nor a global print command, spool files will + be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</P +><P +>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXs from the + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>nobody</TT +> account. If this happens then create + an alternative guest account that can print and set the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +> + in the [global] section.</P +><P +>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing + that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following + will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that + ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = echo Printing %s >> + /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>You may have to vary this command considerably depending + on how you normally print files on your system. The default for + the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing= BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG + or PLP :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</B +></P +><P +>For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing= SYS or HPUX :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>For <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printing=SOFTQ :</B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript + %p %s</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTOK" +></A +>print ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTABLE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTABLE" +></A +>printable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, then + clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory + specified for the service. </P +><P +>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing + to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling + of print data. The <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter controls only non-printing access to + the resource.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printable = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCAP" +></A +>printcap (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTCAPNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printcap name</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERADMIN" +></A +>printer admin (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that can do anything to + printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MSRPC + (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always + has admin rights.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer admin = <empty string></B +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer admin = admin, @staff</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTCAPNAME" +></A +>printcap name (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter may be used to override the + compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> /etc/printcap</TT +>). See the discussion of the <A +HREF="#AEN78" +>[printers]</A +> section above for reasons + why you might want to do this.</P +><P +>On System V systems that use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat</B +> to + list available printers you can use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = lpstat + </B +> to automatically obtain lists of available printers. This + is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in + Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printcap name</I +></TT +> is set to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat</B +> on + these systems then Samba will launch <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>lpstat -v</B +> and + attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.</P +><P +>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> print1|My Printer 1 + print2|My Printer 2 + print3|My Printer 3 + print4|My Printer 4 + print5|My Printer 5 + </PRE +></P +><P +>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact + that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba + that it's a comment.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE</I +>: Under AIX the default printcap + name is <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/qconfig</TT +>. Samba will assume the + file is in AIX <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>qconfig</TT +> format if the string + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>qconfig</TT +> appears in the printcap filename.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = /etc/printcap</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTER" +></A +>printer (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the name of the printer + to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</P +><P +>If specified in the [global] section, the printer + name given will be used for any printable service that does + not have its own printer name specified.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>none (but may be <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>lp</TT +> + on many systems)</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer name = laserwriter</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVER" +></A +>printer driver (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to control the string + that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver + associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or WindowsNT + then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your + system.</P +><P +>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case + sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your + system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should + first try with no <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver</I +></TT +></A +> option set and the client will + give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are + shown in a scrollbox after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer + driver file</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +></A +>printer driver file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver + definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is + to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY</I +></TT +> + /lib/printers.def</TT +></P +><P +>This file is created from Windows 95 <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>msprint.inf + </TT +> files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more + details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95 + clients, see the documentation file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> + directory, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver location</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>None (set in compile).</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver file = + /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" +></A +>printer driver location (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer + share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic + installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up + to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</B +></P +><P +>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, + and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver + files. For more details on setting this up see the documentation + file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT +>.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer driver file</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>none</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$ + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTERNAME" +></A +>printer name (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#PRINTER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> printer</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRINTING" +></A +>printing (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameters controls how printer status + information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the + default values for the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>print command</I +></TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpq command</I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lppause command + </I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lpresume command</I +></TT +>, and + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>lprm command</I +></TT +> if specified in the + [global]f> section.</P +><P +>Currently eight printing styles are supported. They are + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>BSD</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>AIX</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LPRNG</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>PLP</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SYSV</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>HPUX</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>QNX</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SOFTQ</TT +>, + and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>CUPS</TT +>.</P +><P +>To see what the defaults are for the other print + commands when using the various options use the <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +>testparm(1)</A +> program.</P +><P +>This option can be set on a per printer basis</P +><P +>See also the discussion in the <A +HREF="#AEN78" +> [printers]</A +> section.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PRIVATEDIR" +></A +>private dir(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>private dir</I +></TT +> parameter + allows an administator to define a directory path used to hold the + various databases Samba will use to store things like a the machine + trust account information when acting as a domain member (i.e. where + the secrets.tdb file will be located), where the passdb.tbd file + will stored in the case of using the experiemental tdbsam support, + etc...</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>private dir = <compile time location + of smbpasswd></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>private dir = /etc/smbprivate</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PROTOCOL" +></A +>protocol (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest + protocol level that will be supported by the server.</P +><P +>Possible values are :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>CORE</TT +>: Earliest version. No + concept of user names.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>COREPLUS</TT +>: Slight improvements on + CORE for efficiency.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LANMAN1</TT +>: First <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> modern</I +> version of the protocol. Long filename + support.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LANMAN2</TT +>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>NT1</TT +>: Current up to date version of + the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic + negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing + the appropriate protocol.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>protocol = NT1</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>protocol = LANMAN1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="PUBLIC" +></A +>public (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#GUESTOK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest + ok</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" +></A +>queuepause command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to pause the printerqueue.</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printerqueue, + such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</P +><P +>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, + but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 + and NT.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command. + </P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the + server.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>depends on the setting of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing + </I +></TT +></I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>queuepause command = disable %p</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND" +></A +>queueresume command (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter specifies the command to be + executed on the server host in order to resume the printerqueue. It + is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the + previous parameter (<A +HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> queuepause command</I +></TT +></A +>).</P +><P +>This command should be a program or script which takes + a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printerqueue, + such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</P +><P +>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, + but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 + and NT.</P +><P +>If a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%p</I +></TT +> is given then the printername + is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the + command.</P +><P +>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute + path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the + server.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>depends on the setting of <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +></I +> + </P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>queuepause command = enable %p + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READBMPX" +></A +>read bmpx (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will support the "Read + Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>. You should never need to set this + parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read bmpx = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READLIST" +></A +>read list (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that are given read-only + access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then + they will not be given write access, no matter what the <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +> + option is set to. The list can include group names using the + syntax described in the <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> invalid users</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#WRITELIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> write list</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read list = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read list = mary, @students</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READONLY" +></A +>read only (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Note that this is an inverted synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READRAW" +></A +>read raw (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not the server + will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data + to clients.</P +><P +>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in + one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit. + </P +><P +>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable + block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block + sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</P +><P +>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning + tool and left severely alone. See also <A +HREF="#WRITERAW" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>write raw</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read raw = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="READSIZE" +></A +>read size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The option <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read size</I +></TT +> + affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. + If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB + commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger + than this value then the server begins writing the data before it + has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of + SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data + has been read from disk.</P +><P +>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and + network access are similar, having very little effect when the + speed of one is much greater than the other.</P +><P +>The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation + has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely + that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway. + A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate + memory unnecessarily.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read size = 16384</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>read size = 8192</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="REMOTEANNOUNCE" +></A +>remote announce (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to setup <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> to periodically announce itself + to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.</P +><P +>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear + in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation + rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you + can send IP packets to.</P +><P +>For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS + 192.168.4.255/STAFF</B +></P +><P +>the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself + to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. + If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in + the <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>workgroup</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter is used instead.</P +><P +>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast + addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses + of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.</P +><P +>See the documentation file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt</TT +> + in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote announce = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="REMOTEBROWSESYNC" +></A +>remote browse sync (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to setup <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> to periodically request + synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a samba + server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to + gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This + is done in a manner that does not work with any non-samba servers.</P +><P +>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local + clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse + propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere + that you can send IP packets to.</P +><P +>For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255 + </B +></P +><P +>the above line would cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to request + the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to + synchronize their browse lists with the local server.</P +><P +>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast + addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses + of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If + a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate + that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it + is in fact the browse master on it's segment.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>remote browse sync = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS" +></A +>restrict anonymous (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter. If it is true, then + anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the + case where the server is expecting the client to send a username, + but it doesn't. Setting it to true will force these anonymous + connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always + supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter + is only recommened for homogenous NT client environments.</P +><P +>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely + on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistant. NT 4.0 + likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list, + and this is a way to work around that.</P +><P +>When restrict anonymous is true, all anonymous connections + are denied no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability + of a machine to access the samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate + it's machine account after someone else has logged on the client + interactively. The NT client will display a message saying that + the machine's account in the domain doesn't exist or the password is + bad. The best way to deal with this is to reboot NT client machines + between interactive logons, using "Shutdown and Restart", rather + than "Close all programs and logon as a different user".</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>restrict anonymous = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOT" +></A +>root (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory"</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTDIR" +></A +>root dir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory"</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTDIRECTORY" +></A +>root directory (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The server will <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chroot()</B +> (i.e. + Change it's root directory) to this directory on startup. This is + not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the + server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. + It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other + parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names + to access other directories (depending on the setting of the <A +HREF="#WIDELINKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>wide links</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter).</P +><P +>Adding a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> entry other + than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It + absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the + sub-tree specified in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> + option, <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>including</I +> some files needed for + complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability + of the server you will need to mirror some system files + into the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>root directory</I +></TT +> tree. In particular + you will need to mirror <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> (or a + subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for + printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is + operating system dependent.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root directory = /</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root directory = /homes/smb</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPOSTEXEC" +></A +>root postexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>postexec</I +></TT +> + parameter except that the command is run as root. This + is useful for unmounting filesystems + (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#POSTEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> postexec</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPREEXEC" +></A +>root preexec (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec</I +></TT +> + parameter except that the command is run as root. This + is useful for mounting filesystems + (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preexec</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE" +></A +>root preexec close (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the same as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close + </I +></TT +> parameter except that the command is run as root.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PREEXEC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> preexec</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>preexec close</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SECURITY" +></A +>security (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option affects how clients respond to + Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> file.</P +><P +>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to + protocol negotiations with <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide + based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password + information to the server.</P +><P +>The default is <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, as this is + the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and + Windows NT.</P +><P +>The alternatives are <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +>, + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security=domain + </B +>.</P +><P +>In versions of Samba prior to 2..0, the default was + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> mainly because that was + the only option at one stage.</P +><P +>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this + setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client + will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect + drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) + to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that + you are logged into WfWg as.</P +><P +>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their + usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>. If you mostly use usernames + that don't exist on the UNIX box then use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = + share</B +>.</P +><P +>You should also use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> if you + want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This + is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult + to setup guest shares with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, see + the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +>parameter for details.</P +><P +>It is possible to use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> in a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> hybrid mode</I +> where it is offers both user and share + level security under different <A +HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>NetBIOS aliases</I +></TT +></A +>. </P +><P +>The different settings will now be explained.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSHARE" +></A +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>SECURITY = SHARE + </I +></P +><P +>When clients connect to a share level security server then + need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before + attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients + such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with + a username but no password when talking to a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share + </B +> server). Instead, the clients send authentication information + (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect + to that share.</P +><P +>Note that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ALWAYS</I +> + uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = share</B +> level security.</P +><P +>As clients are not required to send a username to the server + in share level security, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> uses several + techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf + of the client.</P +><P +>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given + client password is constructed using the following methods :</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>If the <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest + only</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set, then all the other + stages are missed and only the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +> username is checked. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Is a username is sent with the share connection + request, then this username (after mapping - see <A +HREF="#USERNAMEMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +></A +>), + is added as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If the client did a previous <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>logon + </I +> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the + username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The name of the service the client requested is + added as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to + the list as a potential username.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Any users on the <A +HREF="#USER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> user</I +></TT +></A +> list are added as potential usernames. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +> parameter is + not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. + The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the + UNIX user.</P +><P +>If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +> parameter is + set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked + as available to the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +>, then this + guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</P +><P +>Note that it can be <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>very</I +> confusing + in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually + be used in granting access.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN234" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALUSER" +></A +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>SECURIYT = USER + </I +></P +><P +>This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2. + With user-level security a client must first "log=on" with a + valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <A +HREF="#USERNAMEMAP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username map</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +></A +> parameter) can also + be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <A +HREF="#USER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>user</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#GUESTONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest only</I +></TT +></A +> if set are then applied and + may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after + the user has been successfully authenticated.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN234" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSERVER" +></A +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>SECURITY = SERVER + </I +></P +><P +>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password + by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this + fails it will revert to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user</B +>, but note + that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot + revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> file to check users against. See the + documentation file in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>docs/</TT +> directory + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>ENCRYPTION.txt</TT +> for details on how to set this + up.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that from the clients point of + view <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> is the same as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> security = user</B +>. It only affects how the server deals + with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the + client sees.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN234" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password + server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +><A +NAME="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" +></A +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>SECURITY = DOMAIN + </I +></P +><P +>This mode will only work correctly if <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbpasswd(8)</A +> has been used to add this + machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter to be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. In this + mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing + it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly + the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that a valid UNIX user must still + exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow + Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that from the clients point + of view <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> is the same as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = user + </B +>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, + it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that the name of the resource being + requested is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> sent to the server until after + the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why + guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A +HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>guest account</I +></TT +></A +>. + See the <A +HREF="#MAPTOGUEST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>map to guest</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter for details on doing this.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>BUG:</I +> There is currently a bug in the + implementation of <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +> with respect + to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a + Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently + does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus + a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the + Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</P +><P +>See also the section <A +HREF="#AEN234" +> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +>.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password + server</I +></TT +></A +> parameter and the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypted passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = USER</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = DOMAIN</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SECURITYMASK" +></A +>security mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls what UNIX permission + bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating + the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security + dialog box.</P +><P +>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to + the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in + this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed + to change.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same + value as the <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter. To allow a user to modify all the + user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter to + 0777.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this + restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone + "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will + probably want to set it to 0777.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + security mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameters.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security mask = <same as create mask> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security mask = 0777</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SERVERSTRING" +></A +>server string (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what string will show up in the + printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection + in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net view"</B +>. It can be any string that you wish + to show to your users.</P +><P +>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next + to the machine name.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%v</I +></TT +> will be replaced with the Samba + version number.</P +><P +>A <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%h</I +></TT +> will be replaced with the + hostname.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>server string = Samba %v</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>server string = University of GNUs Samba + Server</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SETDIRECTORY" +></A +>set directory (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>set directory = no</B +>, then + users of the service may not use the setdir command to change + directory.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>setdir</B +> command is only implemented + in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation + for details.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>set directory = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHAREMODES" +></A +>share modes (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This enables or disables the honoring of + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>share modes</I +></TT +> during a file open. These + modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access + to a file.</P +><P +>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so + they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your + UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do).</P +><P +>The share modes that are enabled by this option are + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_DOS</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_ALL</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_READ</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_WRITE</TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_NONE</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DENY_FCB</TT +>. + </P +><P +>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled + by default.</P +><P +>You should <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NEVER</I +> turn this parameter + off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>share modes = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHAREDMEMSIZE" +></A +>shared mem size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>It specifies the size of the shared memory (in + bytes) to use between <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> + processes. This parameter defaults to one megabyte of shared + memory. It is possible that if you have a large erver with many + files open simultaneously that you may need to increase this + parameter. Signs that this parameter is set too low are users + reporting strange problems trying to save files (locking errors) + and error messages in the smbd log looking like <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ERROR + smb_shm_alloc : alloc of XX bytes failed</I +>.</P +><P +>If your OS refuses the size that Samba asks for then + Samba will try a smaller size, reducing by a factor of 0.8 until + the OS accepts it.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>shared mem size = 1048576</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>shared mem size = 5242880 ; Set to 5mb for a + large number of files.</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SHORTPRESERVECASE" +></A +>short preserve case (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls if new files + which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of + suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced + to be the <A +HREF="#DEFAULTCASE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>default case + </I +></TT +></A +>. This option can be use with <A +HREF="#PRESERVECASE" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>preserve case = yes</B +> + </A +> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short + names are lowered. </P +><P +>See the section on <A +HREF="#AEN201" +> NAME MANGLING</A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>short preserve case = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SMBPASSWDFILE" +></A +>smb passwd file (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option sets the path to the encrypted + smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file + is compiled into Samba.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smb passwd file= <compiled + default></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smb passwd file = /usr/samba/private/smbpasswd + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SMBRUN" +></A +>smbrun (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This sets the full path to the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbrun + </B +> binary. This defaults to the value in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> Makefile</TT +>.</P +><P +>You must get this path right for many services + to work correctly.</P +><P +>You should not need to change this parameter so + long as Samba is installed correctly.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbrun=<compiled default> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbrun = /usr/local/samba/bin/smbrun + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOCKETADDRESS" +></A +>socket address (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to control what + address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to + support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each + with a different configuration.</P +><P +>By default samba will accept connections on any + address.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket address = 192.168.2.20</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOCKETOPTIONS" +></A +>socket options (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to set socket options + to be used when talking with the client.</P +><P +>Socket options are controls on the networking layer + of the operating systems which allow the connection to be + tuned.</P +><P +>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba + server for optimal performance for your local network. There is + no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for + your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We + strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your + operating system first (perhaps <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>man setsockopt</B +> + will help).</P +><P +>You may find that on some systems Samba will say + "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you + either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file + to includes.h for your OS. If the latter is the case please + send the patch to <A +HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +> samba@samba.org</A +>.</P +><P +>Any of the supported socket options may be combined + in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</P +><P +>This is the list of socket options currently settable + using this option:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>SO_KEEPALIVE</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_REUSEADDR</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_BROADCAST</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>TCP_NODELAY</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_SNDBUF *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_RCVBUF *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_SNDLOWAT *</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>SO_RCVLOWAT *</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Those marked with a <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>'*'</I +> take an integer + argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable + or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you + don't specify 1 or 0.</P +><P +>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION=VALUE + for example <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>SO_SNDBUF=8192</B +>. Note that you must + not have any spaces before or after the = sign.</P +><P +>If you are on a local network then a sensible option + might be</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B +></P +><P +>If you have a local network then you could try:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</B +></P +><P +>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try + setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. </P +><P +>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba + server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = TCP_NODELAY</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SOURCEENVIRONMENT" +></A +>source environment (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter causes Samba to set environment + variables as per the content of the file named.</P +><P +>If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character + then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and + will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe.</P +><P +>The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should + be formatted as the output of the standard Unix <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>env(1) + </B +> command. This is of the form :</P +><P +>Example environment entry:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME=myhostname</B +></P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>No default value</I +></P +><P +>Examples: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>source environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>source environment = + /usr/local/smb_env_vars</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSL" +></A +>ssl (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If + it is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, the SSL enabled samba behaves + exactly like the non-SSL samba. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, + it depends on the variables <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +></A +> whether an SSL + connection will be required.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl=no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCACERTDIR" +></A +>ssl CA certDir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This variable defines where to look up the Certification + Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for + each CA that samba will trust. The file name must be the hash + value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory + is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the + directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You + don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCACERTFILE" +></A +>ssl CA certFile (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs. + The certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big + file and this variable points to the file. You will probably + only use one of the two ways to define your CAs. The first choice is + preferable if you have many CAs or want to be flexible, the second + is preferable if you only have one CA and want to keep things + simple (you won't need to create the hashed file names). You + don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCIPHERS" +></A +>ssl ciphers (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered + during SSL negotiation. You should not set this variable unless + you know what you are doing.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCLIENTCERT" +></A +>ssl client cert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>The certificate in this file is used by <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +> if it exists. It's needed + if the server requires a client certificate.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCLIENTKEY" +></A +>ssl client key (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This is the private key for <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +>. It's only needed if the + client should have a certificate. </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLCOMPATIBILITY" +></A +>ssl compatibility (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This variable defines whether SSLeay should be configured + for bug compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is + probably not desirable because currently no clients with SSL + implementations other than SSLeay exist.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl compatibility = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLHOSTS" +></A +>ssl hosts (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>See <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLHOSTSRESIGN" +></A +>ssl hosts resign (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>These two variables define whether samba will go + into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, samba will + allow only SSL connections. If the <A +HREF="#SSLHOSTS" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl hosts</I +></TT +></A +> variable lists + hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name), + only these hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> ssl hosts resign</I +></TT +> variable lists hosts, only these + hosts will NOT be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two + variables is the same as for the <A +HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> hosts allow</I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#HOSTSDENY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hosts deny</I +></TT +></A +> pair of variables, only + that the subject of the decision is different: It's not the access + right but whether SSL is used or not. </P +><P +>The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts + outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts = <empty string></B +></P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts resign = <empty string></B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT" +></A +>ssl require clientcert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>If this variable is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, the + server will not tolerate connections from clients that don't + have a valid certificate. The directory/file given in <A +HREF="#SSLCACERTDIR" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certDir</I +></TT +> + </A +> and <A +HREF="#SSLCACERTFILE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl CA certFile + </I +></TT +></A +> will be used to look up the CAs that issued + the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be verified + positively, the connection will be terminated. If this variable + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, clients don't need certificates. + Contrary to web applications you really <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>should</I +> + require client certificates. In the web environment the client's + data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove + to be trustworthy. In a file server environment the server's data + will be sensitive and the clients must prove to be trustworthy.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl require clientcert = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT" +></A +>ssl require servercert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>If this variable is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>, the + <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +> + </A +> will request a certificate from the server. Same as + <A +HREF="#SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>ssl require + clientcert</I +></TT +></A +> for the server.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl require servercert = no</B +> + </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLSERVERCERT" +></A +>ssl server cert (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This is the file containing the server's certificate. + The server <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>must</I +> have a certificate. The + file may also contain the server's private key. See later for + how certificates and private keys are created.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl server cert = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLSERVERKEY" +></A +>ssl server key (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This file contains the private key of the server. If + this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the + certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate). + The server <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>must</I +> have a private key + and the certificate <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>must</I +> + match this private key.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl server key = <empty string> + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SSLVERSION" +></A +>ssl version (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This + is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your + system and the configure option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-ssl</B +> was + given at configure time.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note</I +> that for export control reasons + this code is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOT</I +> enabled by default in any + current binary version of Samba.</P +><P +>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the + SSL protocol that will be used. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl2or3</TT +> allows + dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 or v3, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl2</TT +> results + in SSL v2, <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>ssl3</TT +> results in SSL v3 and + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>tls1</TT +> results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer + Security) is the new standard for SSL.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>ssl version = "ssl2or3"</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATCACHE" +></A +>stat cache (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8)</A +> will use a cache in order to + speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need + to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stat cache = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATCACHESIZE" +></A +>stat cache size (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines the number of + entries in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>stat cache</I +></TT +>. You should + never need to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stat cache size = 50</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STATUS" +></A +>status (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This enables or disables logging of connections + to a status file that <A +HREF="smbstatus.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbstatus(1)</A +> + can read.</P +><P +>With this disabled <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbstatus</B +> won't be able + to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to + change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>status = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRICTLOCKING" +></A +>strict locking (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls the handling of + file locking in the server. When this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> + the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and + deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.</P +><P +>When strict locking is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> the server does file + lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.</P +><P +>Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it + is important, so in the vast majority of cases <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict + locking = no</B +> is preferable.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict locking = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRICTSYNC" +></A +>strict sync (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Many Windows applications (including the Windows + 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to + disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces + the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that + all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored + onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done + rarely. Setting this parameter to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> (the + default) means that smbd ignores the Windows applications requests for + a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the + operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is + little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many + performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 + explorer shell file copies.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#SYNCALWAYS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>sync + always></I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strict sync = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="STRIPDOT" +></A +>strip dot (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls whether to + strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames. This helps with some + CDROMs that have filenames ending in a single dot.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>strip dot = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYNCALWAYS" +></A +>sync always (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter that controls + whether writes will always be written to stable storage before + the write call returns. If this is false then the server will be + guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can + set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous). + If this is true then every write will be followed by a <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>fsync() + </B +> call to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict sync</I +></TT +> parameter must be set to + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> in order for this parameter to have + any affect.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#STRICTSYNC" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>strict + sync</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>sync always = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYSLOG" +></A +>syslog (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages + are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug + level zero maps onto syslog <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_ERR</TT +>, debug + level one maps onto <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_WARNING</TT +>, debug level + two maps onto <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>LOG_NOTICE</TT +>, debug level three + maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> LOG_DEBUG</TT +>.</P +><P +>This paramter sets the threshold for sending messages + to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value + will be sent to syslog.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>syslog = 1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="SYSLOGONLY" +></A +>syslog only (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this parameter is set then Samba debug + messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to + the debug log files.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>syslog only = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" +></A +>template homedir (G)</DT +><DD +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> this parameter is + only available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT + user, the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon + uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. + If the string <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%D</I +></TT +> is present it is substituted + with the user's Windows NT domain name. If the string <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%U + </I +></TT +> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows + NT user name.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>template homedir = /home/%D/%U</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TEMPLATESHELL" +></A +>template shell (G)</DT +><DD +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> this parameter is + only available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT + user, the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon + uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>template shell = /bin/false</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMEOFFSET" +></A +>time offset (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add + to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if + you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight + saving time handling.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time offset = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time offset = 60</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMESERVER" +></A +>time server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter determines if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> + nmbd(8)</A +> advertises itself as a time server to Windows + clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>time server = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="TIMESTAMPLOGS" +></A +>timestamp logs (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> debug timestamp</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" +></A +>unix password sync (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba + attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password + when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. + If this is set to true the program specified in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd + program</I +></TT +>parameter is called <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>AS ROOT</I +> - + to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the + old UNIX password (as the SMB password has change code has no + access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd + program</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> passwd chat</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>unix password sync = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UNIXREALNAME" +></A +>unix realname (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter when set causes samba + to supply the real name field from the unix password file to + the client. This isuseful for setting up mail clients and WWW + browsers on systems used by more than one person.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>unix realname = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UPDATEENCRYPTED" +></A +>update encrypted (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter allows a user logging + on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) + password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as + they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext + password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext + password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account + database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB + challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing + all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the + change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over + to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users + have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd + file this parameter should be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>.</P +><P +>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords</I +></TT +> + </A +> parameter must be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +> when + this parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +>.</P +><P +>Note that even when this parameter is set a user + authenticating to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> must still enter a valid + password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed + (smbpasswd) passwords.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>update encrypted = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERHOSTS" +></A +>use rhosts (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>If this global parameter is a true, it specifies + that the UNIX users <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.rhosts</TT +> file in their home directory + will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed + access without specifying a password.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> The use of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use rhosts + </I +></TT +> can be a major security hole. This is because you are + trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to + get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> use rhosts</I +></TT +> option be only used if you really know what + you are doing.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>use rhosts = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USER" +></A +>user (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#USERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> username</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERS" +></A +>users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#USERNAME" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> username</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAME" +></A +>username (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited + list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against + each username in turn (left to right).</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line is needed only when + the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case + for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg + usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be + better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line is not a great + solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate + the supplied password against each of the usernames in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>username</I +></TT +> line in turn. This is slow and + a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. + You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter + unwisely.</P +><P +>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This + parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints + to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the + supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and + they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a + telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, + so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</P +><P +>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you + can use the <A +HREF="#VALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid users + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name + will be looked up first in the yp netgroups list (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in + the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users + in the group of that name.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name + will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will + expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</P +><P +>If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name + will be looked up only in the yp netgroups database (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list + of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</P +><P +>Note that searching though a groups database can take + quite some time, snd some clients may time out during the + search.</P +><P +>See the section <A +HREF="#AEN234" +>NOTE ABOUT + USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A +> for more information on how + this parameter determines access to the services.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>The guest account if a guest service, + else the name of the service.</B +></P +><P +>Examples:<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username = fred, mary, jack, jane, + @users, @pcgroup</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAMELEVEL" +></A +>username level (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at + the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase + username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the + username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the + username is not found on the UNIX machine.</P +><P +>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. + This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase + combinations to try whilst trying to determine the UNIX user name. The + higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower + the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have + strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>AstrangeUser + </TT +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username level = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username level = 5</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="USERNAMEMAP" +></A +>username map (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This option allows you to specify a file containing + a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be + used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames + that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX + box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username + so that they can more easily share files.</P +><P +>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should + contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed + by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the + right may contain names of the form @group in which case they + will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client + name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the + map file may be up to 1023 characters long.</P +><P +>The file is processed on each line by taking the + supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right + hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of + the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name + on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.</P +><P +>If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is + ignored</P +><P +>If any line begins with an '!' then the processing + will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line. + Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed. + Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line + later in the file.</P +><P +>For example to map from the name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>admin</TT +> + or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>administrator</TT +> to the UNIX name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> root</TT +> you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>root = admin administrator</B +></P +><P +>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>system</TT +> + to the UNIX name <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>sys</TT +> you would use:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>sys = @system</B +></P +><P +>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username + map file.</P +><P +>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then + the netgroup database is checked before the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/group + </TT +> database for matching groups.</P +><P +>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them + by using double quotes around the name. For example:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</B +></P +><P +>would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the + unix username "tridge".</P +><P +>The following example would map mary and fred to the + unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the + '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on + that line.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> !sys = mary fred + guest = * + </PRE +></P +><P +>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences + of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +> fred</TT +> is remapped to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>mary</TT +> then you + will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to + supply a password suitable for <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>mary</TT +> not + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>fred</TT +>. The only exception to this is the + username passed to the <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> password server</I +></TT +></A +> (if you have one). The password + server will receive whatever username the client supplies without + modification.</P +><P +>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect + this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have + trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think + they don't own the print job.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no username map</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UTMP" +></A +>utmp (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean parameter is only available if + Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-utmp</B +>. If set to True then Samba will attempt + to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a + connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the + user connecting to a Samba share.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#UTMPDIRECTORY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> utmp directory</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>utmp = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="UTMPDIRECTORY" +></A +>utmp directory(G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only available if Samba has + been configured and compiled with the option <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> --with-utmp</B +>. It specifies a directory pathname that is + used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that + record user connections to a Samba server. See also the <A +HREF="#UTMP" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>utmp</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. By default this is + not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the + native system is set to use (usually + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/var/run/utmp</TT +> on Linux).</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>no utmp directory</I +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME" +></A +>winbind cache time</DT +><DD +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> this parameter is only + available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the + <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>winbindd(8)</A +> daemon will cache + user and group information before querying a Windows NT server + again.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind cache type = 15</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDGID" +></A +>winbind gid</DT +><DD +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> this parameter is only + available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group + ids that are allocated by the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> winbindd(8)</A +> daemon. This range of group ids should have no + existing local or nis groups within it as strange conflicts can + occur otherwise.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind gid = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind gid = 10000-20000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINBINDUID" +></A +>winbind uid</DT +><DD +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> this parameter is only + available in Samba 3.0.</P +><P +>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group + ids that are allocated by the <A +HREF="winbindd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> winbindd(8)</A +> daemon. This range of ids should have no + existing local or nis users within it as strange conflicts can + occur otherwise.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind uid = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbind uid = 10000-20000</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VALIDCHARS" +></A +>valid chars (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>The option allows you to specify additional + characters that should be considered valid by the server in + filenames. This is particularly useful for national character + sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring.</P +><P +>The option takes a list of characters in either integer + or character form with spaces between them. If you give two + characters with a colon between them then it will be taken as + an lowercase:uppercase pair.</P +><P +>If you have an editor capable of entering the characters + into the config file then it is probably easiest to use this + method. Otherwise you can specify the characters in octal, + decimal or hexadecimal form using the usual C notation.</P +><P +>For example to add the single character 'Z' to the charset + (which is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could + do one of the following</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> valid chars = Z + valid chars = z:Z + valid chars = 0132:0172 + </PRE +></P +><P +>The last two examples above actually add two characters, + and alter the uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.</P +><P +>Note that you <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST</I +> specify this parameter + after the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> parameter if you + have both set. If <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client code page</I +></TT +> is set after + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> parameter the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid + chars</I +></TT +> settings will be overwritten.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>client + code page</I +></TT +></A +> parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Samba defaults to using a reasonable set + of valid characters for English systems</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304 + </B +></P +><P +>The above example allows filenames to have the Swedish + characters in them.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +> It is actually quite difficult to + correctly produce a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> line for + a particular system. To automate the process <A +HREF="mailto:tino@augsburg.net" +TARGET="_top" +>tino@augsburg.net</A +> has written + a package called <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>validchars</B +> which will automatically + produce a complete <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>valid chars</I +></TT +> line for + a given client system. Look in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>examples/validchars/ + </TT +> subdirectory of your Samba source code distribution + for this package.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VALIDUSERS" +></A +>valid users (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that should be allowed + to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' + are interpreted using the same rules as described in the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users</I +></TT +> parameter.</P +><P +>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. + If a username is in both this list and the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid + users</I +></TT +> list then access is denied for that user.</P +><P +>The current servicename is substituted for <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%S + </I +></TT +>. This is useful in the [homes] section.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#INVALIDUSERS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>invalid users + </I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>No valid users list (anyone can login) + </I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>valid users = greg, @pcusers</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VETOFILES" +></A +>veto files(S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of files and directories that + are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must + be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included + in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files + or directories as in DOS wildcards.</P +><P +>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and + must <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> include the unix directory + separator '/'.</P +><P +>Note that the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>case sensitive</I +></TT +> option + is applicable in vetoing files.</P +><P +>One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important + to be aware of, is that if a directory contains nothing but files + that match the veto files parameter (which means that Windows/DOS + clients cannot ever see them) is deleted, the veto files within + that directory <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>are automatically deleted</I +> along + with it, if the user has UNIX permissions to do so.</P +><P +>Setting this parameter will affect the performance + of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories + for a match as they are scanned.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#HIDEFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>hide files + </I +></TT +></A +> and <A +HREF="#CASESENSITIVE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> case sensitive</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>No files or directories are vetoed. + </I +></P +><P +>Examples:<PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> ; Veto any files containing the word Security, + ; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the + ; word root. + veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/ -<p></dl> -<p><a name="WARNINGS"></a> -<h2>WARNINGS</h2> - -<p>Although the configuration file permits service names to contain -spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in -comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the -possibility. -<p>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit -service names to eight characters. <a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>Smbd</strong></a> has no -such limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail -if they truncate the service names. For this reason you should -probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length. -<p>Use of the <a href="smb.conf.5.html#homes"><strong>[homes]</strong></a> and <a href="smb.conf.5.html#printers"><strong>[printers]</strong></a> -special sections make life for an administrator easy, but the various -combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care -when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the -permissions on spool directories are correct. -<p><a name="VERSION"></a> -<h2>VERSION</h2> - -<p>This man page is correct for version 2.0 of the Samba suite. -<p><a name="SEEALSO"></a> -<h2>SEE ALSO</h2> - -<p><a href="smbd.8.html"><strong>smbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="smbclient.1.html"><strong>smbclient (1)</strong></a>, -<a href="nmbd.8.html"><strong>nmbd (8)</strong></a>, <a href="testparm.1.html"><strong>testparm (1)</strong></a>, -<a href="testprns.1.html"><strong>testprns (1)</strong></a>, <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>Samba</strong></a>, -<a href="nmblookup.1.html"><strong>nmblookup (1)</strong></a>, <a href="smbpasswd.5.html"><strong>smbpasswd (5)</strong></a>, -<a href="smbpasswd.8.html"><strong>smbpasswd (8)</strong></a>. -<p><a name="AUTHOR"></a> -<h2>AUTHOR</h2> - -<p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by -Andrew Tridgell <a href="mailto:samba@samba.org"><em>samba@samba.org</em></a>. Samba is now developed -by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the -Linux kernel is developed. -<p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page -sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open -Source software, available at -<a href="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"><strong>ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</strong></a>) -and updated for the Samba2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. -<a href="mailto:samba@samba.org"><em>samba@samba.org</em></a>. -<p>See <a href="samba.7.html"><strong>samba (7)</strong></a> to find out how to get a full -list of contributors and details on how to submit bug reports, -comments etc. -</body> -</html> + ; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server + ; creates. + veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ + </PRE +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VETOOPLOCKFILES" +></A +>veto oplock files (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter is only valid when the <A +HREF="#OPLOCKS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>oplocks</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator + to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that + match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the + <A +HREF="#VETOFILES" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>veto files</I +></TT +></A +> + parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>No files are vetoed for oplock + grants</I +></P +><P +>You might want to do this on files that you know will + be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this + is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy + client contention for files ending in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.SEM</TT +>. + To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use + the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for + the particular NetBench share :</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>veto oplock files = /*;.SEM/ + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="VOLUME" +></A +>volume (S)</DT +><DD +><P +> This allows you to override the volume label + returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs + that insist on a particular volume label.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>the name of the share</I +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WIDELINKS" +></A +>wide links (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not links + in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links + that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the + server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only + to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</P +><P +>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative + effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls + that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wide links = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSPROXY" +></A +>wins proxy (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean that controls if <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>nmbd(8)</A +> will respond to broadcast name + queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this + to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes</TT +> for some older clients.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins proxy = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSSERVER" +></A +>wins server (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP + address for preference) of the WINS server that <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> nmbd(8)</A +> should register with. If you have a WINS server on + your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</P +><P +>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a + multi-subnetted network.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE</I +>. You need to set up Samba to point + to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet + browsing to work correctly.</P +><P +>See the documentation file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BROWSING.txt</TT +> + in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not enabled</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins server = 192.9.200.1</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSHOOK" +></A +>wins hook (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When Samba is running as a WINS server this + allows you to call an external program for all changes to the + WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the + dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as + dynamic DNS.</P +><P +>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script + or executable that will be called as follows:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list + </B +></P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The first argument is the operation and is one + of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can + be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient + information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the + name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated + as an add.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The second argument is the netbios name. If the + name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. + Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores + and periods.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The third argument is the netbios name + type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) + for the name in seconds.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP + addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is + empty then the name should be deleted.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update + program <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nsupdate</B +> is provided in the examples + directory of the Samba source code. </P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WINSSUPPORT" +></A +>wins support (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This boolean controls if the <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> + nmbd(8)</A +> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should + not set this to true unless you have a multi-subnetted network and + you wish a particular <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to be your WINS server. + Note that you should <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NEVER</I +> set this to true + on more than one machine in your network.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins support = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WORKGROUP" +></A +>workgroup (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This controls what workgroup your server will + appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter + also controls the Domain name used with the <A +HREF="#WORKGROUP" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security=domain</B +></A +> + setting.</P +><P +>Default: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>set at compile time to WORKGROUP</I +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>workgroup = MYGROUP</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITABLE" +></A +>writable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> writeable</I +></TT +></A +> for people who can't spell :-).</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITELIST" +></A +>write list (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a list of users that are given read-write + access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then + they will be given write access, no matter what the <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>writeable</I +></TT +></A +> + option is set to. The list can include group names using the + @group syntax.</P +><P +>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the + write list then they will be given write access.</P +><P +>See also the <A +HREF="#READLIST" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read list + </I +></TT +></A +> option.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write list = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write list = admin, root, @staff + </B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITECACHESIZE" +></A +>write cache size (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This integer parameter (new with Samba 2.0.7) + if set to non-zero causes Samba to create an in-memory cache for + each oplocked file (it does <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> do this for + non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request + to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible. + The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset + would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client. + Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored + within it.</P +><P +>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more + efficient write size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to + be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems + where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free + memory for userspace programs.</P +><P +>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache + (per oplocked file) in bytes.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write cache size = 0</B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write cache size = 262144</B +></P +><P +>for a 256k cache size per file.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITEOK" +></A +>write ok (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#WRITEABLE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> writeable</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITERAW" +></A +>write raw (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This parameter controls whether or not the server + will support raw writes SMB's when transferring data from clients. + You should never need to change this parameter.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>write raw = yes</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="WRITEABLE" +></A +>writeable (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>An inverted synonym is <A +HREF="#READONLY" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>read only</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>If this parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>no</TT +>, then users + of a service may not create or modify files in the service's + directory.</P +><P +>Note that a printable service (<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>printable = yes</B +>) + will <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>ALWAYS</I +> allow writing to the directory + (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>writeable = no</B +></P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5053" +></A +><H2 +>WARNINGS</H2 +><P +>Although the configuration file permits service names + to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will + be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a + problem - but be aware of the possibility.</P +><P +>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - + limit service names to eight characters. <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such + clients will fail if they truncate the service names. For this reason + you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters + in length.</P +><P +>Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life + for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default + attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these + sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool + directories are correct.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5059" +></A +><H2 +>VERSION</H2 +><P +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5062" +></A +><H2 +>SEE ALSO</H2 +><P +><A +HREF="samba.7.html" +TARGET="_top" +>samba(7)</A +>, + <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="swat.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="nmbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd(8)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="smbclient.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="nmblookup.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmblookup(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="testparm.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm(1)</B +></A +>, + <A +HREF="testprns.1.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testprns(1)</B +></A +> + </P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN5082" +></A +><H2 +>AUTHOR</H2 +><P +>The original Samba software and related utilities + were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed + by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar + to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P +><P +>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <A +HREF="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/" +TARGET="_top" +> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</A +>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</P +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file |